WO2019187036A1 - Component mounting system - Google Patents

Component mounting system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019187036A1
WO2019187036A1 PCT/JP2018/013719 JP2018013719W WO2019187036A1 WO 2019187036 A1 WO2019187036 A1 WO 2019187036A1 JP 2018013719 W JP2018013719 W JP 2018013719W WO 2019187036 A1 WO2019187036 A1 WO 2019187036A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
work
component
information
setup
supply
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/013719
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
洋一 松下
Original Assignee
ヤマハ発動機株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by ヤマハ発動機株式会社 filed Critical ヤマハ発動機株式会社
Priority to DE112018007404.8T priority Critical patent/DE112018007404T5/en
Priority to JP2020508813A priority patent/JP7018123B2/en
Priority to PCT/JP2018/013719 priority patent/WO2019187036A1/en
Publication of WO2019187036A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019187036A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K13/00—Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing or adjusting assemblages of electric components
    • H05K13/08—Monitoring manufacture of assemblages
    • H05K13/085—Production planning, e.g. of allocation of products to machines, of mounting sequences at machine or facility level
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K13/00—Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing or adjusting assemblages of electric components
    • H05K13/08—Monitoring manufacture of assemblages
    • H05K13/086—Supply management, e.g. supply of components or of substrates

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a component mounting system including a component mounting line in which a plurality of component mounting machines that mount components on a substrate and produce a component mounting substrate are connected.
  • Each component mounter is provided with a plurality of component supply devices for supplying components.
  • a setup operation such as a component replenishment operation for replenishing a component supply device based on a production plan for each substrate type.
  • Patent Document 1 A technique for improving the efficiency of parts replenishment work by an operator is disclosed in Patent Document 1, for example.
  • the position of the splicing unit is detected, and a component supply device (tape feeder) that is a target of component supply work is specified based on the detected position.
  • a component supply device tape feeder
  • the operator can confirm the position of the component supply apparatus used as the object of component replenishment work.
  • the timing of setup work such as component replenishment work that is performed during production of a component mounting board by each component mounting machine in the component mounting line is not uniform in each component mounting machine, and is different for each component mounting machine. . That is, at a certain work timing, there are a component mounter that is a target of the setup work and a component mounter that is not a target of the setup work. For this reason, it is difficult for the worker to grasp the component mounter that is the target of the setup work among the plurality of component mounters on the component mount line, and which component mounter should be moved to? I don't know, and I will go back and forth between multiple component mounters. As a result, there is a delay in the operator's setup work, and the production efficiency of the component mounting board may be reduced due to the delay in the setup work.
  • the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the efficiency of setup work by an operator when producing a component mounting board by each component mounting machine of a component mounting line. It is to provide a component mounting system capable of performing the above.
  • a component mounting system is preset in each of a component mounting line in which a plurality of component mounting machines for mounting a component on a board and producing a component mounting board are connected, and each of the plurality of component mounting machines.
  • a work plan management device for managing a plan of a setup work to be performed by an operator in accordance with production of the component mounting board in the work area, and automatically along a predetermined movement path passing through each work area.
  • the work plan management apparatus includes a work target specifying unit that specifies a work target area that is a work target of the setup work by the worker among the work areas.
  • the automatic guided vehicle has a vehicle body portion having a loading platform portion that accommodates the set-up work article, and a guided movement process in which the vehicle body portion is sequentially moved to the work target area so as to guide the worker.
  • a movement control unit to be executed.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram schematically showing a configuration of a component mounting system according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view which shows the structure of a component mounting machine. It is a figure which shows schematically the tape feeder as a component supply apparatus arrange
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram schematically showing a configuration of a component mounting system 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the component mounting system 1 includes a component mounting line 2L, a work plan management device 3, a production plan management device 4, a board information management device 5, an automatic guided vehicle 6, and a portable terminal device 7 carried by an operator.
  • the mounting control device 20 the production plan management device 4, the board information management device 5, the automatic guided vehicle 6, and the portable terminal device 7 of each component mounting machine 2 constituting the component mounting line 2 ⁇ / It is connected to the management device 3 so that data communication is possible.
  • the component mounting line 2L is configured by connecting a plurality of component mounting machines 2.
  • each of the plurality of component mounting machines 2 is connected so as to be arranged in a straight line by a connecting conveyor that conveys a substrate between the component mounting machines 2.
  • a connecting conveyor that conveys a substrate between the component mounting machines 2.
  • six component mounters 2 are connected in the component mounting line 2L.
  • only one component mounting line 2L is illustrated, but the component mounting system 1 may be configured to include a plurality of component mounting lines 2L.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view showing the configuration of the component mounter 2.
  • the directional relationship will be described using XY orthogonal coordinate axes.
  • One direction side in the X axis direction is referred to as “+ X side”
  • the other direction side opposite to the one direction side in the X axis direction is referred to as “ ⁇ X side”.
  • One direction side in the Y axis direction is referred to as “+ Y side”
  • the other direction side opposite to the one direction side in the Y axis direction is referred to as “ ⁇ Y side”.
  • the component mounting machine 2 is a device that mounts components on the substrate P to produce a component mounting substrate. Note that a solder paste pattern is printed on the substrate P before mounting the components by the component mounting machine 2. That is, the component mounter 2 mounts the component on the board P on which the pattern of the solder paste is printed by the pattern forming apparatus.
  • the component mounter 2 includes a main body frame 21, a moving frame 22, a conveyor 23, a component supply unit 24, a head unit 25, a first drive mechanism 26, a second drive mechanism 27, and a board support device 28. Is provided.
  • the main body frame 21 is a structure in which each part constituting the component mounting machine 2 is arranged, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view as viewed from a direction orthogonal to both the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction.
  • the conveyor 23 extends in the X-axis direction and is disposed on the main body frame 21.
  • the conveyor 23 conveys the substrate P in the X-axis direction.
  • the substrate P transported on the conveyor 23 is positioned by a substrate support device 28 at a predetermined work position (a component mounting position where components are mounted on the substrate P).
  • the substrate support device 28 positions the substrate P by supporting the substrate P with the backup pins.
  • the component supply unit 24 is arranged in a total of four locations, two in the X-axis direction, in each of the region portions on the + Y side and ⁇ Y side in the Y-axis direction of the main body frame 21.
  • the component supply unit 24 supplies components mounted on the board P, and a plurality of component supply devices are arranged in parallel.
  • the component supply device arranged in the component supply unit 24 will be described later.
  • the moving frame 22 extends in the X-axis direction and is supported by the main body frame 21 so as to be movable in a predetermined moving direction (Y-axis direction).
  • a head unit 25 is mounted on the moving frame 22.
  • the head unit 25 is mounted on the moving frame 22 so as to be movable in the X-axis direction. That is, the head unit 25 can move in the Y-axis direction as the moving frame 22 moves, and can move in the X-axis direction along the moving frame 22.
  • the head unit 25 is movable over a predetermined working position of the substrate P conveyed by the component supply unit 24 and the conveyor 23, and removes the component from the component supply unit 24 and mounts the extracted component on the substrate P.
  • the head unit 25 includes a suction nozzle 251.
  • the suction nozzle 251 is a holder that can suck and hold a component supplied by the component supply unit 24.
  • the suction nozzle 251 can communicate with any of a negative pressure generator, a positive pressure generator, and the atmosphere via an electric switching valve. That is, by supplying a negative pressure to the suction nozzle 251, it is possible to hold the component by the suction nozzle 251 (removal of the component), and then, by supplying a positive pressure, the suction holding of the component is released.
  • the first drive mechanism 26 is disposed at the + X side and ⁇ X side ends of the main body frame 21.
  • the first drive mechanism 26 is a mechanism that moves the moving frame 22 in the Y-axis direction.
  • the first drive mechanism 26 includes, for example, a drive motor, a ball screw shaft that extends in the Y-axis direction and is coupled to the drive motor, and a ball nut that is disposed on the moving frame 22 and is screwed with the ball screw shaft. Consists of including.
  • the first drive mechanism 26 having such a configuration moves the moving frame 22 in the Y-axis direction when the ball nut advances and retreats along the ball screw shaft as the ball screw shaft is driven to rotate by the drive motor.
  • the second drive mechanism 27 is disposed on the moving frame 22.
  • the second drive mechanism 27 is a mechanism that moves the head unit 25 in the X-axis direction along the moving frame 22. Similar to the first drive mechanism 26, the second drive mechanism 27 is, for example, a drive motor, a ball screw shaft extending in the X-axis direction and coupled to the drive motor, and the head unit 25. And a ball nut screwed together.
  • the second drive mechanism 27 having such a configuration moves the head unit 25 in the X-axis direction as the ball nut advances and retreats along the ball screw shaft as the ball screw shaft is driven to rotate by the drive motor.
  • the component supply devices arranged in parallel in the component supply unit 24 are roughly classified into a tape feeder, a tray feeder, and a stick feeder depending on the difference in the component supply method.
  • Each component supply unit 24 of the component mounter 2 may be provided with one type of component supply device having the same component supply method, or two or more types of component supply devices having different component supply methods. It may be.
  • a tape feeder as a component supply device is configured such that a component storage tape storing components at predetermined intervals is wound around a reel as a component storage member, and the component storage tape is delivered from the reel. Yes.
  • the tape feeder is roughly classified into a splicing feeder and an automatic loading feeder (AF).
  • the splicing feeder is configured so that one reel is mounted, and before the component storage tape is sent out from the reel and the component is cut out, the component storage tape is transferred to the subsequent component storage tape.
  • the end portion of the preceding component storage tape and the leading end portion of the subsequent component storage tape are attached with a splicing tape or the like to connect them.
  • the splicing work to be applied with the splicing tape or the like is performed before the parts storage tape from one reel is completed and the parts are cut, so that the subsequent part storage tape is wound.
  • the reel supply timing is constrained at the time when the delivery of the preceding component storage tape is completed.
  • the AF is configured so that a plurality of reels can be mounted, and among the plurality of reels, a component storage tape (hereinafter referred to as “preceding component storage tape”) in which component supply is performed in advance is wound.
  • a component storage tape hereinafter referred to as “preceding component storage tape”
  • the subsequent component storage tape is automatically wound without splicing.
  • the component storage tape is sent out from the reel. That is, in AF, the supply timing of a new reel is not restricted to the time when the delivery of the component storage tape from the preceding reel on which the preceding component storage tape is wound is completed, and the component storage following the AF is stored. Since parts can be replenished at any time as long as the tape can be inserted, there is a degree of freedom compared to the splicing feeder.
  • splicing feeders and AF may be mixed as tape feeders arranged in the component supply unit 24, but an AF that can mount a plurality of reels as component storage members is used as the component supply device.
  • an AF that can mount a plurality of reels as component storage members is used as the component supply device.
  • a tape feeder made of AF as the component supply apparatus will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the AF 241
  • FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a component storage tape 243 mounted on the AF 241.
  • the AF 241 is disposed on the carriage 242.
  • the AF 241 can mount a plurality of reels 2420 around which the component storage tape 243 is wound.
  • the component storage tape 243 includes a carrier tape 2431 and a cover tape 2434.
  • the carrier tape 2431 is a tape in which a plurality of component storage portions 2433 that store the components E are arranged at predetermined intervals.
  • the carrier tape 2431 is fitted with tooth portions of a first sprocket 2412A and a second sprocket 2413A in an AF 241 described later at one end in the width direction, and the component storage tape 243 is formed by the first sprocket 2412A and the second sprocket 2413A.
  • the conveying force transmission holes 2432 to which the conveying force for sending out is transmitted are arranged with a predetermined interval.
  • the cover tape 2434 is a tape affixed to the carrier tape 2431 so as to cover the component storage unit 2433.
  • the AF 241 is attached to a feeder attachment portion 2417 ⁇ / b> A provided in the component supply portion 24.
  • the component supply unit 24 is provided with a feeder mounting portion 2417A and a reel support portion 2419.
  • the feeder mounting portion 2417A is provided with a plurality of slots 2417B arranged at regular intervals in the X-axis direction and extending in parallel with each other in the Y-axis direction, and a fixing base 2417C extending in the X-axis direction at a position in front of these slots 2417B. It has been.
  • the AF 241 is set in each slot 2417B, and each AF 241 is fixed to the fixed base 2417C. As a result, a plurality of AFs 241 are juxtaposed on the carriage 242 in the component supply unit 24.
  • the reel support portion 2419 is located on the lower rear side of the feeder mounting portion 2417A, and supports the first reel holder 2419A and the second reel holder 2419B that rotatably support the reel 2420 while being separated from each other in the vertical direction. To do.
  • a component storage tape 243 is wound around a reel 2420 supported by each of the first reel holder 2419A and the second reel holder 2419B.
  • the AF 241 includes a feeder main body 2411.
  • the AF 241 is fixed to the fixing base 2417C in a state where the feeder main body 2411 is inserted (set) into the slot 2417B.
  • the feeder main body 2411 includes a first sprocket 2412A constituting the first tape delivery section 2412 and a second tape delivery section 2413 spaced from the reel support section 2419 with respect to the first sprocket 2412A in the Y-axis direction.
  • the second sprocket 2413A that constitutes is supported rotatably.
  • Each of the first sprocket 2412A and the second sprocket 2413A includes a plurality of tooth portions arranged with a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.
  • the tooth portions of the first sprocket 2412 ⁇ / b> A and the second sprocket 2413 ⁇ / b> A can be fitted into a conveying force transmission hole 2432 formed in the carrier tape 2431 of the component storage tape 243.
  • the component storage tape 243 wound around the reel 2420 supported by each of the first reel holder 2419A and the second reel holder 2419B is guided by a guide roller 2418 provided at the upper end of the reel support portion 2419 while being guided by the first reel holder 2419B. It is guided to the sprocket 2412A and the second sprocket 2413A.
  • the component storage tape 243 in which the conveying force transmission hole 2432 is fitted to the teeth of the first sprocket 2412A and the second sprocket 2413A is sent out by the rotation of the first sprocket 2412A and the second sprocket 2413A, and the component is received at the component supply position P1. E is taken out.
  • the AF 241 further includes a tape support member 2414 detachably fixed to the rear end portion of the feeder main body 2411, an operation input portion 2415 disposed on the upper surface of the rear portion of the feeder main body 2411, and first and second tape detection sensors 2416A. , 2416B.
  • the tape support member 2414 has two upper and lower passages (an upper passage 2414AA and a lower passage 2414AB) in the rear end portion of the tape running passage 2414A in which the component storage tape 243 travels inside the feeder main body 2411. And the component storage tape 243 that passes through the upper passage 2414AA is supported from the lower side.
  • the rear end portion of the tape running path 2414A has a shape that expands in the vertical direction from the front to the rear.
  • the tape support member 2414 is inserted into the tape running path 2414A from the rear of the feeder main body 2411, and is detachably fixed to the feeder main body 2411.
  • the rear end portion of the tape running passage 2414A is divided into an upper passage 2414AA and a lower passage 2414AB by the tape support member 2414.
  • the first tape detection sensor 2416A and the second tape detection sensor 2416B are provided so as to face the tape travel path 2414A, and detect the presence / absence of the component storage tape 243 that passes through the tape travel path 2414A. More specifically, the first tape detection sensor 2416A is provided at a position in front of the junction of the upper passage 2414AA and the lower passage 2414AB and facing the tape travel passage 2414A from below. On the other hand, the second tape detection sensor 2416B is provided at a position facing the upper passage 2414AA from above, and thereby detects the presence or absence of the component storage tape 243 in the upper passage 2414AA.
  • the operation input unit 2415 is for the operator to send and reverse the component storage tape 243 as necessary.
  • the component supply operation of the AF 241 configured as described above is as follows. First, as a preparatory work, the worker attaches a reel 2420 around which a component storage tape 243 preceding the first reel holder 2419A on the lower stage of the reel support portion 2419 is wound. At this time, the operator performs a reading operation of reading the component type specifying barcode BR (recording unit, see FIG. 3) provided on the reel 2420 with the barcode reader 8 (FIG. 7).
  • the component type identification bar code BR is coded and recorded, for example, supply component type information for identifying the component type of the component E stored in the component storage tape 243 wound around the reel 2420.
  • the worker inserts the tip of the component storage tape 243 wound around the reel 2420 attached to the first reel holder 2419A into the upper passage 2414AA from the rear of the feeder body 2411.
  • the leading end of the preceding component storage tape 243 is supported by the tape support member 2414 in a state of being fitted to the first sprocket 2412A.
  • the operator operates the operation input unit 2415, inputs an instruction to rotate the first sprocket 2412A, sends the component storage tape 243, and fits the tip of the component supply tape 243 with the second sprocket 2413A.
  • the part supply operation of the AF 241 is started in the state where the above preparation work is completed.
  • the second sprocket 2413 ⁇ / b> A rotates, thereby feeding the component storage tape 243.
  • the first sprocket 2412A is configured to idle, and at this time, the component storage tape 243 can be delivered only by rotating the second sprocket 2413A.
  • the operator removes the tape support member 2414 from the feeder main body 2411 while the preceding component storage tape 243 is being fed from the reel 2420.
  • the component storage tape 243 is displaced to the bottom surface of the tape travel path 2414A by its own weight. Thereby, the fitting of the preceding component storage tape 243 with the first sprocket 2412A is released.
  • the component storage tape tape 243 continues to be sent out by the rotation of the second sprocket 2413A even if the fitting with the first sprocket 2412A is released.
  • the operator attaches the tape support member 2414 to the feeder main body 2411, and removes the reel 2420 around which the preceding component storage tape 243 is wound. Move from the lower first reel holder 2419A to the upper second reel holder 2419B.
  • the operator lowers the reel 2420 around which the subsequent component storage tape 243 is wound. Is attached to the first reel holder 2419A, and the tip of the component storage tape 243 is inserted into the upper passage 2414AA from the rear of the feeder main body 2411.
  • the leading end of the subsequent component storage tape 243 is supported by the tape support member 2414 in a state of being fitted to the first sprocket 2412.
  • the reel 2420 around which the subsequent component storage tape 243 is wound can be mounted in a state in which the component shortage of the previous component storage tape 243 wound around the reel 2420 has not occurred.
  • the operator can also specify the component type specifying barcode BR provided on the reel 2420 as in the case of the previous component storage tape 243. Is read by the barcode reader 8 (FIG. 7).
  • the preceding component storage tape 243 is all pulled out from the reel 2420 supported by the upper second reel holder 2419B, and the rear end thereof passes through the position of the second tape detection sensor 2416B.
  • feeding of the subsequent component storage tape 243 from the reel 2420 supported by the lower first reel holder 2419A is automatically started.
  • the operator removes the reel 2420 having run out of parts from the upper second reel holder 2419B, and removes the reel 2420 around which the subsequent component storage tape 243 is wound from the lower first reel holder 2419A to the second upper reel. Move to reel holder 2419B.
  • the operator can replenish the AF 241 with a new reel on which the component storage tape 243 is wound.
  • the new reel supplied to the AF 241 is attached to the lower first reel holder 2419A by the operator. Also at this time, the operator performs a reading operation of reading the barcode for identifying the component type provided on the new reel by the barcode reader 8.
  • the timing of the new reel component replenishment operation is not restricted by the time when the reel 2420 around which the preceding component storage tape 243 is wound runs out of components, and is specified by the operation plan management device 3. .
  • the preceding component storage tape 243 is delivered from the reel 2420 supported by the upper second reel holder 2419B, and the subsequent component storage tape 243 wound around the reel 2420 supported by the lower first reel holder 2419A. In the state in which the tip of this is inserted into the upper passage 2414AA, it is impossible to mount a new reel. On the other hand, the preceding component storage tape 243 is all drawn out from the reel 2420 supported by the upper second reel holder 2419B, and the subsequent component storage tape 243 from the reel 2420 supported by the lower first reel holder 2419A. In the state in which the delivery of the machine is automatically started, a new reel can be mounted.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the tray feeder 245.
  • a plurality of tray feeders 245 can be juxtaposed in the component supply unit 24.
  • the tray feeder 245 is configured such that one magazine 2453 can move in the vertical direction within the cover body 2451. In this magazine 2453, a plurality of first pallets 2454, a plurality of second pallets 2455, and a plurality of third pallets 2456 are accommodated.
  • Each first pallet 2454 is loaded with at least one first tray TR1 holding a plurality of components.
  • the parts held in the first tray TR1 are the same type of parts for each first pallet 2454.
  • at least one second tray TR2 holding a plurality of components is placed on each second pallet 2455.
  • the parts held in the second tray TR2 are the same type of parts for each second pallet 2455.
  • the type of the component held in the second tray TR2 is different from the component held in the first tray TR1.
  • Each third pallet 2456 is loaded with at least one third tray TR3 holding a plurality of components.
  • the parts held in the third tray TR3 are the same type of parts for each third pallet 2456.
  • the types of components held on the third tray TR3 are different from the types of components held on the first tray TR1 and the second tray TR2.
  • Each of the first pallet 2454, the second pallet 2455, and the third pallet 2456 has a function as a component storage member on which trays TR1, TR2, and TR3 holding a plurality of components are placed.
  • Each of the first pallet 2454, the second pallet 2455, and the third pallet 2456 accommodated in the magazine 2453 is moved to a table 2452 provided to project outward from the cover body 2451 during the production of the component mounting board. As a result, the components are supplied while being held on the trays TR1, TR2, and TR3.
  • the other first The pallet 2454 is moved to the table 2452, so that the parts are supplied while being held on the first tray TR1. At this time, the worker can take out the first pallet 2454 that has run out of components from the cover body 2451 and supply a new first pallet to the tray feeder 245 during the production of the component mounting board.
  • the second pallet 2455 is moved to the table 2452 so that the parts are supplied while being held on the second tray TR2. At this time, the operator can take out the second pallet 2455 out of components from the cover body 2451 during the production of the component mounting board, and replenish the tray feeder 245 with a new second pallet. Further, during the production of the component mounting board, even if the component held on the third tray TR3 placed on one third pallet 2456 of the plurality of third pallets 2456 becomes out of components, The third pallet 2456 is moved to the table 2452 so that the parts are supplied while being held on the third tray TR3. At this time, the worker can take out the third pallet 2456 out of components from the cover body 2451 and supply a new third pallet to the tray feeder 245 during the production of the component mounting board.
  • the work plan management device 3 performs management related to a new pallet component supply work plan for the tray feeder 245.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the stick feeder 246.
  • a plurality of stick feeders 246 can be juxtaposed in the component supply unit 24.
  • the stick feeder 246 is configured to supply the component E stored in a stick 2469 as a cylindrical component storage member while being pushed out from the stick 2469.
  • the stick feeder 246 includes a frame main body 2461, a stick table 2462 provided at an upper portion of the frame main body 2461, a first chuck 2463 and a second chuck 2464, a component push-out mechanism 2465, a guide frame 2466, and a pair of guides.
  • a rail 2467 and a conveyor belt 2468 are provided.
  • the frame main body 2461 has a hollow box shape with an open top.
  • the stick table 2462 is disposed inside the upper portion of the frame main body 2461.
  • a plurality of sticks 2469 can be stacked on the stick table 2462.
  • the first chuck 2463 can simultaneously hold the front end portion of the stick 2469 other than the lowest one of the plurality of sticks 2469 on the stick table 2462.
  • the second chuck 2464 can simultaneously hold the rear end portion of the stick 2469 other than the lowest one of the plurality of sticks 2469 on the stick table 2462.
  • the component pushing mechanism unit 2465 pushes the component E forward from the lowest stick 2469 among the plurality of sticks 2469 on the stick table 2462.
  • the guide frame 2466 is fixed to the front portion of the frame main body 2461, and a pair of guide rails 2467 are supported on the guide frame 2466.
  • a conveyance belt 2468 is provided between the pair of guide rails 2467.
  • the component E pushed forward by the component push-out mechanism 2465 is conveyed along the pair of guide rails 2467 by the conveyance belt 2468. As a result, the component E stored in the stick 2469 is supplied to the component supply position.
  • the first and second chucks 2463 and 2464 hold the sticks 2469 other than the lowermost one.
  • the stick table 2462 is displaced to the support release position for releasing the support of the stick 2469, so that only the lowest stick 2469 is dropped by its own weight onto the inner bottom portion of the frame body 2461.
  • the stick table 2462 is returned to the support position of the stick 2469, and the first and second chucks 2463 and 2464 are opened, whereby the remaining stick 2469 on the stick table 2462. And the part E is supplied from the next (lowest) stick 2469.
  • the operator can supply a new stick to the stick feeder 246.
  • the operator performs a reading operation of reading the part type specifying barcode provided on the new stick with the barcode reader 8.
  • Management related to the plan of a new stick replenishment work for the stick feeder 246 is performed by the work plan management device 3.
  • the control system of the component mounting machine 2 includes a mounting control device 20.
  • the mounting control device 20 is a device that comprehensively controls the component mounting operation of the component mounting machine 2 and controls the operation of the component supply device including the AF 241, the tray feeder 245, and the stick feeder 246.
  • the mounting control device 20 is composed of a microcomputer in which a storage device such as a ROM (Read Only Memory) for storing a control program and a flash memory for temporarily storing data is built, for example, and by reading the control program, The component mounting operation of the component mounter 1 and the operation of the component supply device are controlled.
  • ROM Read Only Memory
  • the mounting control device 20 includes a communication unit 201, a storage unit 202, a display unit 203, an external input / output unit 204, a component mounting operation processing unit 205, and a component supply operation processing unit 206, which are connected via a bus 20A.
  • the communication unit 201 is an interface for data communication with the component supply device and the work plan management device 3. All the component supply devices arranged in each component supply unit 24 of the component mounter 2 are connected to the communication unit 201.
  • the external input / output unit 204 is an interface for data communication with the barcode reader 8.
  • the storage unit 202 stores the attachment information JH1 shown in FIG.
  • the attachment information JH1 is information regarding components in the component supply device arranged in each component supply unit 24 of the component mounter 2.
  • Mounting information JH1 includes mounting model information J11, set position information J12, device type information J13, component type information J14, remaining component number information J15, remaining component number warning value information J16, and remaining component number stop value. Information associated with information J17.
  • the mounted model information J11 is information for specifying the component mounter 2.
  • the set position information J12 is information representing a position in the component supply unit 24 of the component supply apparatus. When the component supply device is AF241, the set position information J12 is information specified by the position of the slot 2417B in the feeder mounting portion 2417A. Different slot numbers are assigned to the slots 2417B, and the position of each slot 2417B, that is, the set position is specified by this slot number.
  • the device type information J13 is information representing the type of component supply device (the type of component supply method).
  • the component type information J14 is information for specifying the component type of the component supplied by each component supply device, and is indicated by identification information for identifying the component, component name information indicating the name of the component, and the like.
  • the component remaining number information J15 is information representing the total component remaining number of components in each component supply apparatus.
  • the remaining part number warning value information J16 is a predetermined value (part remaining part number) in which the total remaining part number represented by the remaining part number information J15 before the part runs out of parts in each part supply device. Number warning value).
  • the component remaining number stop value information J17 is information that is particularly applied to the splicing feeder, and the total component remaining number represented by the component remaining number information J15 is a predetermined value (stopped for splicing work). (Part remaining number stop value).
  • the AF 241, tray feeder 245, and stick feeder 246 do not have the concept of “predetermined value to stop feeding the tape for the splicing operation”. For this reason, the remaining component number stop value information J17 in the AF 241, the tray feeder 245, and the stick feeder 246 is the same as the remaining component number warning value information J16.
  • the display unit 203 displays information transmitted from the work plan management apparatus 3 (described later) received by the communication unit 201.
  • the component mounting operation processing unit 205 controls the operation of the head unit 25 and the like in the production of the component mounting board by the component mounting machine 2.
  • the component supply operation processing unit 206 transmits a control signal to the feeder control unit 240 of each component supply device via the communication unit 201 to perform a process for comprehensively controlling the operation of each component supply device.
  • the component mounter 2 is set with a work area WA in which a setup work by an operator is performed.
  • the component mounter 2 includes a work area WA including a component supply unit 24 disposed on the ⁇ Y side of the component mounter 2, and a component supply unit disposed on the + Y side of the component mounter 2.
  • a work area WA including 24 is set.
  • work areas WA located on the ⁇ Y side of each component mounter 2 are arranged side by side in the X-axis direction.
  • Work areas WA located on the + Y side are arranged side by side in the X-axis direction.
  • the arrangement of the work areas WA located on the ⁇ Y side of each component mounter 2 and the arrangement of the work areas WA located on the + Y side of each component mounter 2 are respectively referred to as “lanes”. ".
  • the work plan management device 3 is a device that manages a plan of a setup work to be performed by an operator in accordance with the production of a component mounting board in the work area WA set for each component mounter 2.
  • the setup operation includes a component supply operation for supplying a new component storage member to each of the plurality of component supply devices arranged in the component supply unit 24 and a plurality of accompanying operations other than the component supply operation.
  • the parts supply work includes a new reel supply work for the AF 241, a new pallet supply work for the tray feeder 245, a new stick supply work for the stick feeder 246, and a splicing work for the splicing feeder.
  • the manufacturing operation of the mega reel is an operation of manufacturing a reel on which a component storage tape having a large number of components that can be mounted on the AF 241 is wound. Specifically, two reels wound with a component storage tape are prepared, the tips of the component storage tape of one reel and the component storage tape of the other reel are joined, and one reel is connected to the other reel. One reel (mega reel) is produced by winding the reel component storage tape.
  • the tray baking operation is an operation for baking a tray placed on a pallet that can be mounted on the tray feeder 245. By baking the tray using a heating device or the like, moisture or the like attached to the tray is removed.
  • the solder paste agitating operation is an operation for preparing a solder paste to be printed on the substrate P before mounting the components, and is an operation for agitating the solder paste using an agitator or the like.
  • the cleaning operation of the suction nozzle is an operation for cleaning and preparing the suction nozzle 251 suitable for holding components for each substrate type with respect to the suction nozzle 251 provided in the head unit 25.
  • the suction nozzle replacement operation is an operation for replacing the suction nozzle 251 provided in the head unit 25.
  • the backup pin preparation operation is an operation of preparing a backup pin suitable for supporting the substrate P for each substrate type with respect to the backup pin provided in the substrate support device 28.
  • the waste material collecting operation is a work for collecting the waste material after the components are taken out by the head unit 25 (for example, the waste tape, the empty reel, the empty tray, the empty stick, etc. after the components are taken out).
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the work plan management apparatus 3.
  • the work plan management device 3 includes a mounting control device 20, a production plan management device 4, a board information management device 5, an automatic guided vehicle 6, and a portable terminal carried by an operator. It is connected to the device 7 so that data communication is possible.
  • the work plan management apparatus 3 includes, for example, a microcomputer, and includes a communication unit 31, an operation unit 32, a display unit 33, and a control unit 34 as shown in FIG.
  • the operation unit 32 includes a touch panel, a numeric keypad, a start key, a setting key, and the like, and accepts operator operations and various settings for the work plan management device 3.
  • the display unit 33 displays work list information that is generated by a work management unit 342 of the control unit 34 (described later) and updated by the work progress determination unit 343.
  • the communication unit 31 is an interface for realizing data communication with the mounting control device 20, the production plan management device 4, the board information management device 5, the automatic guided vehicle 6, and the mobile terminal device 7 of each component mounting machine 2. .
  • the communication unit 31 acquires information transmitted from the mounting control device 20, the production plan management device 4, the board information management device 5, the automatic guided vehicle 6, and the portable terminal device 7 of each component mounting machine 2. Information is given to the control unit 34.
  • the communication unit 31 is provided with work list information generated by the work management unit 342 and updated by the work progress determination unit 343 from the control unit 34, and the work list information is provided to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2. Then, it is transmitted (output) to the automatic guided vehicle 6 and the portable terminal device 7.
  • the production plan management device 4 is a device for managing the production plan of the component mounting board by each component mounting machine 2.
  • the production plan management device 4 is composed of a microcomputer, for example.
  • the production plan management device 4 transmits production plan information related to the production plan for the component mounting board to the work plan management device 3 by the operation of the operator who creates the production plan.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the production plan information JH2 transmitted from the production plan management device 4 and input to the work plan management device 3.
  • the production plan information JH2 is information in which production order information J21, board type information J22, production quantity information J23, part type information J14, and cycle time information J24 are associated with each other.
  • the production order information J21 is information representing the production order of the component mounting boards.
  • the board type information J22 is information representing the type of board P used for production of the component mounting board.
  • the production number information J23 is information representing the production number of component mounting boards for each board type.
  • the cycle time information J24 is information representing the time (seconds / sheet) required to mount a component during production of one component mounting board.
  • the board information management device 5 is a device for managing board information that is referenced when each component mounting machine 2 produces a component mounting board.
  • the board information management device 5 is composed of, for example, a microcomputer.
  • the board information management apparatus 5 transmits the board information to the work plan management apparatus 3 by the operator's operation.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the board information JH3 transmitted from the board information management apparatus 5 and input to the work plan management apparatus 3.
  • the board information JH3 is information in which the board type information J22, the set position information J12, the component type information J14, and the necessary component number information J31 are associated with each other.
  • the required component number information J31 is information relating to the required number (number / piece) of components required for the production of one component mounting board.
  • the board information JH3 is rewritten every time the type of the board P represented by the board type information J22 is switched.
  • the board information JH3 is transmitted to the mounting control apparatus 20 of each component mounter 2 via the work plan management apparatus 3, and is referred to when the component mounters 2 produce the component mounted boards.
  • the component mounting operation processing unit 205 of the mounting control device 20 controls the operation of the head unit 25 and the like based on the substrate information JH3 in the production of the component mounting board by the component mounting machine 2.
  • the board information JH3 when the parts are supplied by the parts supply device arranged at the set position represented by the set position information J12 during the production of the board kind represented by the board type information J22, the head unit 25 is The component represented by the component type information J14 is controlled to be taken out from the component supply device.
  • the control unit 34 of the work plan management apparatus 3 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory) for storing a control program, a RAM (Random Access Memory) used as a work area of the CPU, and the like. .
  • the control unit 34 controls the communication unit 31, the operation unit 32, and the display unit 33 by the CPU executing a control program stored in the ROM, and generates various types of information related to the management of the setup work plan.
  • the control unit 34 includes a component supply monitoring unit 341, a work management unit 342, a work progress determination unit 343, and a storage unit 344.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the control operation of the work plan management apparatus 3.
  • a component mounting board of the first board type is produced in the first production period TW01, and then the board type is switched, and a component mounting board of the second board type is produced in the second production period TW02. An example is shown.
  • TW01 first production period
  • TW02 second production period
  • the parts supply work includes parts supply work for supplying new reels to AFs 241A, 241B, and 241C, parts supply work for supplying new pallets to tray feeders 245A and 245B, and stick feeder 246A. This includes parts replenishment work for replenishing a new stick.
  • the AF 241A, 241B, 241C, the tray feeders 245A, 245B, and the stick feeder 246A are collectively referred to as “component feeders 241, 245, 246”. Called.
  • the component supply monitoring unit 341 obtains a management start time TS that represents the management start time of the component supply work plan for each of the AFs 241A, 241B, 241C, the tray feeders 245A, 245B, and the stick feeder 246A.
  • the component supply monitoring unit 341 may acquire the time at which the production of the component mounting board in the first production period TW01 is started as the management start time TS, or the command information for instructing the management start is obtained via the operation unit 32.
  • the time when the command information is input may be acquired as the management start time TS.
  • the component supply monitoring unit 34 when acquiring the management start time TS, monitors the supply status of the components in each of the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246 from the management start time TS.
  • the component supply monitoring unit 341 specifies a replenishable time zone that represents a time zone during which component replenishment work is possible for each of the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246.
  • the replenishable time zone TWSA is specified for AF241A
  • the replenishable time zone TWSB is specified for AF241B
  • the replenishable time zone TWSC is specified for AF241C.
  • a replenishable time zone TWSD is specified for the tray feeder 245A
  • a replenishable time zone TWSE is specified for the tray feeder 245B.
  • a replenishable time zone TWSF is specified for the stick feeder 246A.
  • the earliest time in each of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF (hereinafter referred to as “earliest time”) is preceded by component supply among a plurality of component storage members mounted on the component supply devices 241, 245 and 246. This is the time when the preceding component storage member to be performed becomes a component exhaustion. When the preceding component storage member runs out of parts, a new component storage member can be supplied. Further, the latest time (hereinafter referred to as “latest time”) in each of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF is the total number of remaining parts of the plurality of parts storage members mounted on the parts supply devices 241, 245 and 246 This is the time when the predetermined remaining component warning value is reached.
  • the component supply monitoring unit 341 is information given from the communication unit 31 to the control unit 34, and includes mounting information JH 1 from the mounting control device 20 of each component mounting machine 2 and production plan information JH 2 from the production plan management device 4. Based on the board information JH3 from the board information management apparatus 5, the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF are specified for each of the component supply apparatuses 241, 245, and 246.
  • the component supply monitoring unit 341 first subtracts the component remaining number in the subsequent component storage member from the total component remaining number represented by the component remaining number information J15 of the attachment information JH1 to obtain the preceding component. The number of remaining parts in the storage member is obtained. Further, the component supply monitoring unit 341 calculates the necessary number for each component specified by the component type information J14 necessary for the production of one component mounting board represented by the component necessary number information J31 of the board information JH3. Divided by the component mounting time of the component at the time of production of one component mounting board for each board specified by the board type information J22 represented by the cycle time information J24 of the production plan information JH2 Find the number of parts used.
  • the component supply monitoring unit 341 calculates the earliest time in each of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF by dividing the number of remaining components in the preceding component storage member by the number of used components per second. On the other hand, the component supply monitoring unit 341 obtains the number of components obtained by subtracting the component remaining number warning value represented by the component remaining number warning value information J16 from the total component remaining number represented by the component remaining number information J15. By dividing by the number of used parts per second, the latest time in each of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF is obtained.
  • the total number of remaining parts represented by the remaining part number information J15 is subtracted every time a part is taken out by the head unit 25.
  • the component stored in the new component storage member Is added to the total remaining number of parts that changes each time a part is taken out by the head unit 25, so that the total remaining part number is updated.
  • the number of parts stored in the new part storage member (initial setting number) is stored in the ROM or the like of the control unit 34 for each part specified by the part type information J14.
  • the component storage member in use is replenished as a new component storage member, the actual number of components stored in the component storage member is stored in the ROM or the like of the control unit 34. The default number is rewritten.
  • the component supply monitoring unit 341 updates the specific result of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF at a predetermined cycle (for example, 30-second cycle) in response to the update of the remaining component number information J15.
  • the component supply monitoring unit 341 may be configured to specify the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF in the first production period TW01 of the first board type, or in addition to the first board type.
  • the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF may be specified in consideration of the production period after the second board type.
  • the work management unit 342 supplies components to each of the AFs 241A, 241B, 241C, the tray feeders 245A, 245B, and the stick feeder 246A based on the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF specified by the component supply monitoring unit 341.
  • the work management unit 342 includes a work target specifying unit 3421 and a work timing specifying unit 3422.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies a component supply target device to be a component supply work target in the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246. Specifically, the work target specifying unit 3421 first recognizes overlapping replenishment time zones that overlap in each of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF. In the example illustrated in FIG. 12, the work target specifying unit 3421 includes a plurality of first overlapping supply time zone TWD1, second overlapping supply time zone TWD2, and third overlapping supply time zone TWD3 in order from the earliest in time series. Recognizing overlapping supply hours.
  • the first overlapping replenishment time zone TWD1 is a time zone that overlaps the replenishable time zone TWSA of AF241A and the replenishable time zone TWSB of AF241B.
  • the earliest time (earliest time) of the first overlapping supply time zone TWD1 coincides with the earliest time T1 in the AF241B replenishable time zone TWSB, and the latest time (latest time) of the first overlapping supply time zone TWD1 is This corresponds to the latest time T2 in the replenishable time zone TWSA of AF241A.
  • the second overlapping replenishment time zone TWD2 is a time zone that overlaps the replenishable time zone TWSC of AF241C and the replenishable time zone TWSD of the tray feeder 245A.
  • the earliest time (earliest time) of the second overlapping supply time zone TWD2 coincides with the earliest time T3 in the AF241C replenishable time zone TWSC, and the latest time (latest time) of the second overlapping supply time zone TWD2 is This corresponds to the latest time T4 in the replenishable time zone TWSD of the tray feeder 245A.
  • the third overlapping replenishment time zone TWD3 is a time zone that overlaps the replenishable time zone TWSE of the tray feeder 245B and the replenishable time zone TWSF of the stick feeder 246A.
  • the earliest time (earliest time) of the third overlapping replenishment time zone TWD3 coincides with the earliest time T5 in the replenishable time zone TWSF of the stick feeder 246A, and the latest time (latest time) of the third overlapping replenishment time zone TWD3.
  • the latest time T6 in the replenishable time zone TWSE of the tray feeder 245B corresponds to the latest time T6 in the replenishable time zone TWSE of the tray feeder 245B.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies all the component supply devices that can perform the component supply work in the overlapping supply time zones TWD1, TWD2, and TWD3 as the component supply target devices.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies a component supply target device for each of the first to third overlapping supply time zones TWD1, TWD2, and TWD3.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies AFs 241A and 241B as component supply target devices that can perform a component supply operation within the first overlapping supply time period TWD1.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies the AF 241C and the tray feeder 245A as component supply target devices that can perform the component supply work within the second overlapping supply time period TWD2.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies the tray feeder 245B and the stick feeder 246A as component supply target devices that can perform the component supply work in the third overlapping supply time period TWD3.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies all the component supply devices that can perform the component supply work in the overlapping supply time zones TWD1, TWD2, and TWD3 as the component supply target devices.
  • the parts supply devices 241, 245, and 246 that can supply the component storage members within the overlapping supply time zones TWD 1, TWD 2, and TWD 3 are collectively supplied by the operator. Is possible. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the worker goes under each of the component mounting machines 2 provided with the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246, and to reduce the load of component replenishment work by the worker. .
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies a work target area that is a work target of a setup work (part replenishment work) by the worker among the work areas WA set in each component mounting machine 2 of the component mounting line 2L. .
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies the work area WA in which the component supply target device is arranged as the work target area. More specifically, the work target specifying unit 3421 recognizes the set position information J12 associated with the device type information J13 representing the component supply target device based on the attachment information JH1, and is represented by the set position information J12.
  • the work area WA including the set position is specified as the work target area.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 updates the specification result of the work target region.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 may be configured to specify a work target region in the first production period TW01 of the first board type, or the first board.
  • the work target area may be specified in consideration of the production period after the second board type in addition to the type.
  • the work timing specifying unit 3422 supplies the same component replenishment work to the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246 arranged at the set position in the work target area specified by the work target specifying unit 3421.
  • the timing is specified for each of the first to third overlapping supply time zones TWD1, TWD2, and TWD3.
  • the work timing specifying unit 3422 specifies the first supply work timing TH1 as the parts supply work timing within the first overlapping supply time period TWD1 that is the same for the AFs 241A and 241B.
  • the work timing specifying unit 3422 specifies the second supply work timing TH2 as the timing of parts supply work within the same second overlap supply time zone TWD2 with respect to the AF 241C and the tray feeder 245A.
  • the work timing specifying unit 3422 specifies the third replenishment work timing TH3 as the timing of parts replenishment work within the third overlapping replenishment time zone TWD3 for the tray feeder 245B and the stick feeder 246A.
  • the work timing specifying unit 3422 specifies the earliest time T1 of the first overlapping supply time period TWD1 as the first supply operation timing TH1 within the first overlapping supply time period TWD1.
  • the earliest time T1 of the first overlap supply time zone TWD1 is the earliest time in the first overlap supply time zone TWD1.
  • the work timing specifying unit 3422 specifies the earliest time T3 of the second overlap supply time zone TWD2 as the second supply timing TH2 within the second overlap supply time zone TWD2, and within the third overlap supply time zone TWD3. It is desirable to specify the earliest time T5 of the third overlapping supply time zone TWD3 as the third supply timing TH3.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 may be configured to partition the first production period TW01 into a plurality of specific periods TW11, TW12, and TW13 having a predetermined specific time as a time interval.
  • the specific time that defines the time interval between the specific periods TW11, TW12, and TW13 is input by an operator via the operation unit 32, and is set to an arbitrary time such as 30 minutes.
  • the first specific period TW11, the second specific period TW12, and the third specific period TW13 are referred to in order from the earliest in chronological order.
  • the time intervals in each of the first to third specific periods TW11, TW12, and TW13 are set to be constant.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 recognizes the first to third overlapping supply time zones TWD1 to TWD3 that overlap in the possible supply time zones TWSA to TWSF corresponding to each of the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246. Further, the work target specifying unit 3421 includes the earliest time in any one of the first to third overlapping supply time zones TWD1 to TWD3 in each of the first to third specific periods TW11, TW12, and TW13. Judge whether or not. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the earliest time of the first overlapping supply time zone TWD1 is included in the first specific period TW11, and the earliest time of the second overlapping supply time period TWD2 is included in the second specific period TW12. The earliest time of the third overlapping supply time zone TWD3 is included in the period TW13.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 is between the earliest time of the first overlap supply time zone TWD1 and the latest time (latest time) of the first specification period TW11 in the first overlap supply time zone TWD1.
  • the AFs 241A and 241B are specified as the component supply target devices that can perform the component supply operation in the time zone.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 is between the earliest time of the second overlap supply time zone TWD2 and the latest time (latest time) of the second specification period TW12 in the second overlap supply time zone TWD2.
  • the AF 241C and the tray feeder 245A are specified as the component supply target devices that can perform the component supply operation in the time zone.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 is between the earliest time of the third overlap supply time zone TWD3 and the latest time (latest time) of the third specification period TW13 in the third overlap supply time zone TWD3.
  • a tray feeder 245B and a stick feeder 246A are specified as parts supply target devices capable of supplying parts in a time zone.
  • the work timing specifying unit 3422 includes, within the first overlapping supply time zone TWD1, within the time zone between the earliest time of the first overlapping supply time zone TWD1 and the latest time of the first specific time period TW11, AF241A, The same first supply work timing TH1 is specified for 241B. In addition, the work timing specifying unit 3422 is within the time zone between the earliest time of the second duplicate supply time zone TWD2 and the latest time of the second specific period TW12 in the second overlap supply time zone TWD2. The same second supply operation timing TH2 is specified for the AF 241C and the tray feeder 245A.
  • the work timing specifying unit 3422 is within the time zone between the earliest time of the third overlapping supply time zone TWD3 and the latest time of the third specific period TW13 in the third overlapping supply time zone TWD3.
  • the same third supply work timing TH3 is specified for the tray feeder 245B and the stick feeder 246A.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 of the work management unit 342 generates first work list information JH4 shown in FIG. 13 as information indicating the result of specifying the work target area.
  • the first work list information JH4 is information obtained by listing the work target area in association with the setup work (part supply work) performed in the work target area.
  • the first work list information JH4 is information to which work progress status information representing the determination result of the progress status of the setup work (part supply work) by the work progress judgment unit 343, which will be described later, is added. Further, in the first work list information JH4, work target areas are arranged and listed in order from the upstream to the downstream of the movement path of the automatic guided vehicle 6 described later.
  • the first work list information JH4 includes movement path number information J41, work target area number information J42, component mounting line name information J43, lane name information J44, the mounting model information J11, and the set position information.
  • J12, device type information J13, part type information J14, remaining parts number information J31, replenishable time information J45, warning time information J46, stop time information J47, production available time information J48, work progress status information J49, work Standard time information J50 and allowable stay time information J51 are associated with each other.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the guided movement process based on the first work list information JH4, which is executed by the movement control unit 63 of the automatic guided vehicle 6 described later.
  • the component mounting machines 2 on the component mounting line 2 ⁇ / b> L are arranged in order from the upstream to the downstream of the movement path 6 ⁇ / b> R of the automatic guided vehicle 6, which will be described later.
  • 2B a third component mounter 2C, a fourth component mounter 2D, a fifth component mounter 2E, and a sixth component mounter 2F.
  • the work area set in the first component mounting machine 2A is shown as a first work area WA1
  • the work area of the second component mounter 2B is the second work area WA2 and the third component mounter.
  • the work area of 2C is the third work area WA3, the work area of the fourth component mounter 2D is the fourth work area WA4, the work area of the fifth component mounter 2E is the fifth work area WA5, and the sixth component mounter 2F.
  • the work area is indicated as a sixth work area WA6.
  • the work target specifying unit 3421 includes the first work area WA1, the third work area WA3, the fourth work area WA4, and the sixth work area WA1 to WA6 among the first to sixth work areas WA1 to WA6.
  • the work area WA6 is specified as the work target area.
  • a plurality of AFs 241 and splicing feeders SPF are mixedly arranged in the first work area WA1, and two of these AFs 241A and splicing feeders SPF are specified as parts replenishment target devices, thereby the first work
  • the area WA1 is a work target area.
  • a plurality of AFs 241 are arranged in the third work area WA3, and five AFs 241A among these AFs 241A are specified as the component supply target devices, and thereby the third work area WA3 is set as the work target area.
  • a plurality of tray feeders 245 are arranged in the fourth work area WA4, and two of these tray feeders 245A are specified as the component supply target devices, and thereby the fourth work area WA4 is set as the work target area.
  • a plurality of stick feeders 246 are arranged in the sixth work area WA6, and two of these stick feeders 246A are specified as the parts supply target devices, whereby the sixth work area WA6 is set as the work target area. Yes.
  • the movement route number information J41 is information for specifying the position of the movement route 6R of the automatic guided vehicle 6 described later.
  • the work target area number information J42 identifies each work target area (first work area WA1, third work area WA3, fourth work area WA4, sixth work area WA6) specified by the work target specifying unit 3421.
  • the component mounting line name information J43 is information for specifying the component mounting line 2L.
  • the work target area represented by the work target area number information J42 belongs to an arrangement (lane) of work areas located on either the ⁇ Y side or the + Y side of each of the component mounters 2A to 2F. It is the information showing.
  • the replenishable time information J45 indicates that the component replenishment work is performed on the component replenishment target device arranged at the set position represented by the set position information J12 in each work target region represented by the work target region number information J42. It is information representing the time until it becomes possible.
  • the warning time information J46 is stored in a component supply target device (AF241A, tray feeder (TF) 245A, stick feeder (SF) 246A, splicing feeder SPF) disposed at the set position represented by the set position information J12. This is information representing the time until the total number of remaining parts represented by the number information J15 reaches the remaining part number warning value.
  • the stop time information J47 is obtained until the total remaining part number represented by the remaining part number information J15 reaches the remaining part number stop value in the parts supply target device arranged at the set position represented by the set position information J12. It is the information showing the time.
  • the stop time information J47 is the number of remaining parts. This is information indicating the time until the total number of remaining parts represented by the information J15 reaches zero (0).
  • the stop time information J47 is represented by the component remaining number information J15. This is information representing the time until the total number of remaining parts reaches the predetermined value.
  • the production possible time information J48 is a component supply target device (AF241A, tray feeder (TF) 245A, stick feeder (SF) 246A, splicing feeder SPF) arranged at the set position represented by the set position information J12. This is information representing the time during which component supply can be continued according to the production of the mounted substrate.
  • Each of the warning time information J46, the stop time information J47, and the production possible time information J48 is also information that defines a time limit for starting a part supply work (setup work) for the parts supply target device.
  • a work start time limit is set for the parts supply work (setup work) for the parts supply target device.
  • the time limit for starting work is the time when the total number of remaining parts represented by the remaining part number information J15 reaches the remaining part number warning value, and the total remaining part number represented by the remaining part number information J15 is the remaining part number. Examples include the time when the stop value is reached and the time when the component supply target device cannot continue the component supply. That is, if the component supply operation for the component supply target device is not started before the time limit is reached, the possibility of the component supply stop by the component supply target device increases, which affects the production of the component mounting board.
  • the work progress status information J49 is information representing the determination result of the progress status of the setup work (part replenishment work) by the work progress judgment unit 343 described later.
  • the work standard time information J50 is information representing a work standard time required from the start of the part supply work (setup work) to the end of the work for the part supply target device.
  • the work standard time represented by the work standard time information J50 is set for each work type of parts supply work (setup work). For example, the work standard time for parts supply work for supplying a new reel to the AF 241A is set to “30 seconds”, and the work standard time for parts supply work for supplying a new pallet to the tray feeder 245A is “50”.
  • the standard work time of parts supply work for supplying a new stick to the stick feeder 246A is set to "45 seconds".
  • the work standard time of the splicing work for the splicing feeder SPF is set to “90 seconds”, for example.
  • the work standard time represented by the work standard time information J50 may be a weighting coefficient attached according to the work ability of the worker OP for each component supply work (setup work).
  • the allowable stay time information J51 is the work target area (first work area WA1, third work area WA3, fourth work area WA4, sixth work area WA6) represented by the work target area number information J42. It is the information showing the allowable stay time in which the below-mentioned automatic guided vehicle 6 is allowed to stay.
  • the allowable stay time represented by the allowable stay time information J51 is the number of work for each work type of the component replenishment work (setup work) in each work target area and the standard work time represented by the work standard time information J50. And can be calculated based on the above. Specifically, the stay allowable time is calculated for each work target area, and is represented by a total value for each work type, which is a product of the number of parts supply work and the work standard time.
  • the work progress determination unit 343 monitors in real time the progress of all the setup work (part supply work) performed in each of the work target areas specified by the work target specifying unit 3421, and the progress status is determined. It is determined whether the situation is a work start, a work end, or a work not performed. As described above, the work progress status information J49 indicating the determination result of the progress status of the setup work (part supply work) by the work progress determination unit 343 is added to the first work list information JH4.
  • the work progress determination unit 343 determines that the progress status of the setup work is “work not performed”, and the determination result is The work progress status information J49 to be represented is added to the first work list information JH4.
  • the work progress determination unit 343 has a work target area (third work area WA3, fourth work area WA4, and sixth work area WA6) represented by the work target area number information J42. It is determined that the set-up work (part replenishment work) is “work not performed”. Then, the work progress determination unit 343 sets the work progress status information J49 corresponding to these work target areas as “not implemented”.
  • Supply component type information JH01 (FIG. 14) is input to the mounting control device 20 of the mounting machine 2 via the external input / output unit 204.
  • the mounting control device 20 to which the supply component type information JH01 is input transmits the supply component type information JH01 to the work plan management device 3 via the communication unit 201.
  • the work progress determination unit 344 indicates the progress status of the component supply work based on the first work list information JH4. It is determined that the “work has not been performed” has shifted to “work start”.
  • the work progress determination unit 344 receives the set position information J12 associated with the part type information J13 representing the same type of part as the part type of the supply part type information JH01. To extract. Then, the work progress determination unit 344 changes the progress status of the component supply work for the component supply target device arranged at the set position represented by the extracted set position information J12 from “work not performed” to “work start”. It determines with having transferred, and adds the work progress status information J49 showing the determination result to the 1st work list information JH4. In the example illustrated in FIGS.
  • the work progress determination unit 343 sets the set represented by the set position information J12 in the first work area WA1 that is the work target area represented by the work target area number information J42. It is determined that the progress status of the splicing work for the splicing feeder SPF arranged at the position “S13” has shifted from “work not performed” to “work start”. The work progress determination unit 343 sets the work progress status information J49 corresponding to the set position “S13” of the set position information J12 as “work start”.
  • the feeder control unit 240 When the supply detection information JH02 (FIG. 14) is output from the component supply target device after the operator OP performs the barcode reading operation for the component type using the barcode reader 8, the feeder control unit 240 outputs the supply detection information JH02.
  • the supply detection information JH02 is transmitted to the mounting control device 20.
  • the replenishment detection information JH02 is information indicating that the component replenishment work for the component replenishment target device has been completed. For example, when the component supply target apparatus is AF241A, the detection information output from the first tape detection sensor 2416A when the first tape detection sensor 2416A detects the component storage tape indicates that the component supply operation for the AF241A is completed. This is supply detection information JH02 representing this.
  • the mounting control device 20 to which the replenishment detection information JH02 is input transmits the replenishment detection information JH02 to the work plan management device 3 via the communication unit 201.
  • the work progress determination unit 344 indicates that the progress status of the component replenishment work is “based on the first work list information JH4. It is determined that the operation has shifted from “work start” to “work end”.
  • the work progress determination unit 344 extracts set position information J12 representing the set position where the component replenishment target device that has output the replenishment detection information JH02 is arranged. Then, the work progress determination unit 344 shifts the progress status of the component supply work for the component supply target device arranged at the set position represented by the extracted set position information J12 from “work start” to “work end”. The work progress status information J49 representing the determination result is added to the first work list information JH4. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 13 and 14, the work progress determination unit 343 sets the set represented by the set position information J12 in the first work area WA1 that is the work target area represented by the work target area number information J42.
  • the work progress determination unit 343 sets the work progress status information J49 corresponding to the set positions “S11” and “S12” of the set position information J12 as “work end”.
  • the first work list information JH4 generated by the work target specifying unit 3421 and added with the work progress status information J49 updated in real time by the work progress determination unit 343 is stored in the storage unit 344 of the work plan management device 3. At the same time, it is displayed on the display unit 33. Further, the first work list information JH4 is transmitted to the mounting control device 20, the automatic guided vehicle 6 described later, and the portable terminal device 7 via the communication unit 31.
  • the storage unit 344 of the work plan management apparatus 3 stores the first work list information JH4 updated in response to the work target specifying unit 3421 updating the work target area specifying result in a predetermined cycle.
  • the first work list information JH4 When the first work list information JH4 is input to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2, the first work list information JH4 is displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20. When the first work list information JH4 is input to the mobile terminal device 7 carried by the worker OP, the first work list information JH4 is displayed on the mobile terminal device 7. When the first work list information JH4 is input to the automatic guided vehicle 6, the movement operation of the automatic guided vehicle 6 is controlled based on the first work list information JH4.
  • the automatic guided vehicle 6 is a guided vehicle that can automatically move along a predetermined movement path 6R passing through the work area WA set in each component mounting machine 2 of the component mounting line 2L. is there.
  • the automatic guided vehicle 6 includes a vehicle body portion 61 having a loading platform portion 62 that accommodates an article G for setup work, a movement control portion 63, and a notification portion 64.
  • the movement control unit 63 Based on the first work list information JH4, the movement control unit 63 sequentially moves the vehicle body 61 to the work target area represented by the work target area number information J42 so as to guide the worker OP and stops it.
  • the guided movement process is executed.
  • the automatic guided vehicle 6 guides the operator OP in the state where the article G for setup work is accommodated in the loading platform 62 by the guidance movement process of the movement control unit 63.
  • the vehicle sequentially moves to and stops at the first work area WA1, the third work area WA3, the fourth work area WA4, and the sixth work area WA6 that are the work target areas represented by the work target area number information J42.
  • the operator OP can move along the movement path 6R using the automatic guided vehicle 6 as a mark, and can perform the setup work (parts supply work) in the work target area at the position where the automatic guided vehicle 6 stops. .
  • the worker OP selects the work target area based on the first work list information JH4 displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7.
  • the contents of the setup work can be grasped.
  • the operator OP can move with the automatic guided vehicle 6 as a mark, and can easily grasp the component mounter 2 to be set up, and further understand the contents of the set up work based on the first work list information JH4. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the setup work by the operator OP.
  • the movement control unit 63 performs the guided movement process based on the work progress status information J49 representing the determination result regarding the progress status of the setup work by the work progress determination unit 343 added to the first work list information JH4. Execute. Accordingly, the movement control unit 63 moves the automatic guided vehicle 6 relative to the work target area based on the real-time progress status of the work start, work end, and work not performed, which is determined by the work progress determination unit 343. Can be controlled.
  • the movement control unit 63 is in a state where the vehicle body unit 61 is stopped in a work target region where a setup work (part supply work) whose work progress status is “work not performed” represented by the work progress status information J49 exists. Even when the progress status of all the setup work in the work target area is “work finished”, the vehicle body unit 61 is moved toward the work target area to be the next destination and stopped. Good. Alternatively, the movement control unit 63 determines that the progress status other than one setup work is “work end” and the progress status of the one setup work is “work start” in the work target area where the vehicle body 61 is stopped. When it becomes, the structure which moves the vehicle-body part 61 toward the work object area
  • the automatic guided vehicle 6 is in the state of stopping in the first work area WA1, and each set position “S11”, “S12”, “S13” of the first work area WA1.
  • the vehicle moves to the third work area WA3 as the next destination and stops.
  • the parts supply work for the parts supply target devices arranged at the set positions “S11” and “S12” becomes “work end”, and
  • the component supply operation for the component supply target device arranged at the set position “S13” becomes “work start”
  • the vehicle moves to the third work area WA3 as the next movement destination and stops.
  • the worker OP can grasp the work content in the third work area WA3 based on the first work list information JH4 displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7.
  • the operator OP after finishing all the setup work to be performed in the work target area where the automatic guided vehicle 6 is stopped, The automatic guided vehicle 6 can be used as a mark to move to the next work target area. Thereby, it can suppress as much as possible that the setup work in the state where work is not performed remains and accumulates.
  • the first work list information JH4 includes the allowable stay time information J51 associated with the work standard time information J50.
  • the movement control unit 63 is in a state where the vehicle body unit 61 is stopped in a work target region where a setup work (part supply work) whose work progress status is “work not performed” represented by the work progress status information J49 exists.
  • the allowable stay time represented by the allowable stay time information J51 elapses, the vehicle body 61 may be moved and stopped toward the work target area to be the next destination.
  • the automated guided vehicle 6 stays in the first work area WA1 and is allowed to stay corresponding to the first work area WA1 represented by the stay allowable time information J51.
  • the vehicle moves to the third work area WA3, which is the next destination, and stops.
  • the worker OP can grasp the work content in the third work area WA3 based on the first work list information JH4 displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7.
  • the automatic guided vehicle 6 enters the work target area based on the elapse of the allowable stay time based on the work standard time set individually for each setup work. Move sequentially and stop.
  • the worker OP performs the set-up work using the allowable stay time during which the automatic guided vehicle 6 is stopped as a guideline for the total work time required to complete all the set-up work in the work target area. be able to. For this reason, the worker OP can perform the setup work in each work target area, with the period of movement and stop of the automatic guided vehicle 6 as the work period.
  • the notification unit 64 of the automatic guided vehicle 6 measures the remaining time until the stop time of the vehicle body 61 reaches the allowable stay time represented by the allowable stay time information J51, and sets the remaining time to a predetermined threshold. When it reaches, it will notify you. Thereby, the worker OP can carry out the setup work in each work target area using the notification by the notification unit 64 as a guide.
  • the warning time information J46, the stop time information J47, and the production are possible as information for defining the start time of the parts supply work (setup work) for the parts supply target device.
  • Time information J48 is included.
  • the work progress determination unit 343 updates the work progress status information J49 when recognizing the presence of a priority work that is a set-up work that should be prioritized based on the time limit.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the second work list information JH4A updated when the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the presence of the priority work. In the example shown in FIG.
  • the progress status of all the component supply operations in the first work area WA1 is “work end”, and the parts placed in the set positions “S31” and “S32” in the third work area WA3.
  • the progress status of the component replenishment work for the replenishment target device is “work completion”.
  • the parts supply work for the parts supply target device arranged at the set position “S62” in the sixth work area WA6 is expressed by the warning time information J46, the stop time information J47, and the production possible time information J48. Is shown as an impending priority task.
  • the progress position of the component supply operation is set to “set position“
  • the parts supply work whose work progress status information J49 is set to the “skip” state by the work progress determination unit 343 is a setup work whose execution has been postponed in order to prioritize the execution of the priority work.
  • the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the presence of the priority work, and the second work list information JH4A in which the work progress status information J49 is updated is sent to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2 via the communication unit 31 and unmanned conveyance. It is transmitted to the car 6 and the mobile terminal device 7.
  • the second work list information JH4A is input to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2
  • the second work list information JH4A is displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20.
  • the second work list information JH4A is input to the mobile terminal device 7 carried by the worker OP
  • the second work list information JH4A is displayed on the mobile terminal device 7.
  • the movement operation of the automatic guided vehicle 6 is controlled based on the second work list information JH4A.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the guided movement process based on the second work list information JH4A, which is executed by the movement control unit 63.
  • the movement control unit 63 recognizes the presence of priority work based on the time limit represented by the warning time information J46, the stop time information J47, and the production possible time information J48, the movement control unit 63 in the work target area where the vehicle body unit 61 is stopped. Regardless of the progress of the setup work, the vehicle body 61 is moved toward the work target area corresponding to the priority work and stopped.
  • the automatic guided vehicle 6 stops in the third work area WA3.
  • the vehicle passes through the fourth work area WA4, moves to the sixth work area WA6 corresponding to the priority work, and stops regardless of the progress of the setup work in the third work area WA3.
  • the automatic guided vehicle 6 stops immediately after moving toward the sixth work area WA6 as a work target area where the priority work should be performed. To do.
  • the worker OP can perform the priority work.
  • the worker OP can grasp the work contents of the priority work in the sixth work area WA6 based on the second work list information JH4A displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7. .
  • the execution is postponed (“skip” state), and the set positions “S33”, “S34”. , “S35”, “S41”, “S42”, “S61”, the parts supply work is incorporated into the next work plan.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing the third work list information JH4B updated when the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes that the setup work cannot be started.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the guided movement process based on the third work list information JH4B, which is executed by the movement control unit 63.
  • Work start availability information JH03 (FIG. 18) may be output from the mounting control device 20 in each component mounting machine 2 of the component mounting line 2L.
  • the work start availability information JH03 is information representing the availability of work start for a setup work that has not been performed. For example, in the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246 arranged in the work area WA set in the component mounter 2, when it is impossible to start a component supply operation for supplying a new component storage member, the component supply Work start availability information JH03 indicating that the work cannot be started is output from the mounting control device 20.
  • the work start availability information JH03 output from the mounting control device 20 is input to the work plan management device 3 via the communication unit 31 (first information acquisition unit).
  • the work progress determination unit 343 sets up in the work area WA of the component mounter 2 corresponding to the mounting control device 20 that has output the work start availability information JH03. It is determined whether the work can be started. If it is determined that the setup work cannot be started based on the work start availability information JH03, the work progress determination unit 343 updates the work progress status information J49.
  • the third work list information JH4B illustrated in FIG. 17 is work list information updated when the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes that the setup work cannot be started.
  • the automatic guided vehicle 6 stops in the first work area WA1, and the progress status of all the parts supply work in the first work area WA1 is “work finished”.
  • the work start availability information JH03 is output from the mounting control device 20 of the third component mounter 2C in which the third work area WA3 is set.
  • the work progress determination unit 343 determines that the parts supply work cannot be started in the third work area WA3 based on the work start availability information JH03, the set positions “S31” and “S32” in the third work area WA3. ”,“ S33 ”,“ S34 ”, and“ S35 ”, the progress status of the component supply work is set to the“ pending ”state.
  • the parts replenishment work in which the work progress status information J49 is set to the “pending” state by the work progress determination unit 343 is a setup work that is on standby until the work can be started.
  • the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes that the setup work cannot be started based on the work start availability information JH03, and the third work list information JH4B in which the work progress status information J49 is updated is sent to each component mounter 2 via the communication unit 31. Are transmitted to the mounting control device 20, the automatic guided vehicle 6, and the portable terminal device 7.
  • the third work list information JH4B is input to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2
  • the third work list information JH4B is displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20.
  • the third work list information JH4B is input to the mobile terminal device 7 carried by the worker OP
  • the third work list information JH4B is displayed on the mobile terminal device 7.
  • the third work list information JH4B is input to the automatic guided vehicle 6, the movement operation of the automatic guided vehicle 6 is controlled based on the third work list information JH4B.
  • the movement control unit 63 determines that it is impossible to start the setup work in the work target area as the next movement destination based on the third work list information JH4B while the vehicle body part 61 is stopped, the work target area The vehicle body 61 is not allowed to move to the position, and the vehicle body 61 is put on standby until the setup work can be started.
  • the movement control unit 63 is in the third work area WA3 that is the next work target area in the state where the automatic guided vehicle 6 is stopped in the first work area WA1. It is determined that it is impossible to start the setup work. In this case, the automatic guided vehicle 6 is not allowed to move to the third work area WA3 and waits in the first work area WA1 until the setup work in the third work area WA3 can be started. As described above, when it is impossible to start the setup work in the work area of the next movement destination, the automatic guided vehicle 6 stands by on the spot. The operator OP can recognize that the setup work in the next work target area cannot be started by recognizing the state where the automatic guided vehicle 6 is waiting. Further, the operator OP indicates in the third work list information JH4B displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7 that the setup work cannot be started in the next work target area. It is also possible to grasp based on this.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram for describing the fourth work list information JH4C updated when the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the presence of an emergency work.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the guided movement process based on the fourth work list information JH4C, which is executed by the movement control unit 63.
  • Urgent request information JH04 may be output from the mounting control device 20 in each component mounting machine 2 of the component mounting line 2L.
  • the emergency request information JH04 is information representing a request for performing an emergency operation on the component mounter 2.
  • the urgent work is a urgent and different work from the setup work, and is a work for solving an operation trouble of the component mounter 2, for example.
  • the emergency request information JH04 output from the mounting control device 20 is input to the work plan management device 3 via the communication unit 31 (second information acquisition unit).
  • the work progress determination unit 343 performs an emergency work to be performed on the component mounter 2 corresponding to the mounting control apparatus 20 that has output the emergency request information JH04. Recognize that it exists.
  • the work progress determination unit 343 updates the work progress status information J49.
  • the fourth work list information JH4C illustrated in FIG. 19 is work list information updated when the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the presence of an emergency work.
  • the progress status of all the parts supply work in the first work area WA1 is “work end”, and is arranged at the set positions “S31” and “S32” in the third work area WA3.
  • the progress status of the component replenishment work for the device to be replenished parts is “work completed”.
  • the emergency request information JH04 is output from the mounting control device 20 of the fifth component mounting machine 2E in which the fifth work area WA5 is set. .
  • the work progress determination unit 343 When the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the existence of an emergency work to be performed on the fifth component mounter 2E based on the emergency request information JH04, it indicates that there is an emergency work to be performed in the fifth work area WA5. Then, information with “emergency work” added as the work progress status is inserted into the work progress status information J49. Further, the work progress determination unit 343 sets each of the set positions “S33” and “S34” after the set position “S32” where the progress status of the component supply work is “work finished” until the inserted “emergency work”. ”,“ S35 ”,“ S41 ”, and“ S42 ”, the progress status of the component supply operation is set to the“ skip ”state.
  • the parts supply work whose work progress status information J49 is set to the “skip” state by the work progress determination unit 343 is a setup work whose execution has been postponed in order to prioritize the execution of the emergency work.
  • the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the presence of the emergency work based on the emergency request information JH04, and the fourth work list information JH4C in which the work progress status information J49 is updated is mounted on each component mounter 2 via the communication unit 31. It is transmitted to the control device 20, the automatic guided vehicle 6, and the mobile terminal device 7.
  • the fourth work list information JH4C is input to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2
  • the fourth work list information JH4C is displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20.
  • the fourth work list information JH4C is input to the mobile terminal device 7 carried by the worker OP
  • the fourth work list information JH4C is displayed on the mobile terminal device 7.
  • the fourth work list information JH4C is input to the automatic guided vehicle 6, the movement operation of the automatic guided vehicle 6 is controlled based on the fourth work list information JH4C.
  • the movement control unit 63 When the movement control unit 63 recognizes the presence of the emergency work based on the fourth work list information JH4C updated according to the emergency request information JH04, the movement control unit 63 determines the progress of the setup work in the work target area where the vehicle body part 61 is stopped. Regardless, the vehicle body 61 is moved toward the work area WA of the component mounter 2 that has output the emergency request information JH04 and stopped.
  • the movement control unit 63 applies to the fifth component mounting machine 2E in which the fifth work area WA5 is set while the automatic guided vehicle 6 is stopped in the first work area WA1. Recognizes the existence of urgent work to be carried out. In this case, the automatic guided vehicle 6 passes through the fourth work area WA4, moves to the fifth work area WA5 corresponding to the emergency work, and stops regardless of the progress of the setup work in the third work area WA3. . As described above, when there is an emergency work different from the setup work, the automatic guided vehicle 6 stops suddenly toward the fifth work area WA5 of the fifth component mounter 2E on which the emergency work is to be performed. .
  • the worker OP can perform emergency work.
  • the worker OP can grasp the work contents of the emergency work in the fifth work area WA5 based on the fourth work list information JH4C displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7. .
  • each set position “S33”, “S34”, “S35”, “ The parts supply work corresponding to “S41” and “S42” is incorporated into the next work plan.
  • a component mounting system is preset in each of a component mounting line in which a plurality of component mounting machines for mounting a component on a board and producing a component mounting board are connected, and each of the plurality of component mounting machines.
  • a work plan management device for managing a plan of a setup work to be performed by an operator in accordance with production of the component mounting board in the work area, and automatically along a predetermined movement path passing through each work area.
  • the work plan management apparatus includes a work target specifying unit that specifies a work target area that is a work target of the setup work by the worker among the work areas.
  • the automatic guided vehicle has a vehicle body portion having a loading platform portion that accommodates the set-up work article, and a guided movement process in which the vehicle body portion is sequentially moved to the work target area so as to guide the worker.
  • a movement control unit to be executed.
  • the work target area that is the work target of the setup work by the worker is determined by the work target specifying unit of the work plan management apparatus. Identified.
  • the automatic guided vehicle sequentially moves to the work target area and stops so as to guide the worker in a state where the article for the setup work is accommodated in the loading platform.
  • the worker can move along the movement route using the automatic guided vehicle as a mark, and can perform the setup work in the work target area at the position where the automatic guided vehicle stops. Since the operator can use the automatic guided vehicle as a mark and can easily grasp the component mounting machine to be set up, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the set-up work by the operator.
  • each of the plurality of component mounting machines includes a plurality of component supply devices that are arranged in parallel in the work area and are capable of mounting a component storage member in which components are stored. , Including a component supply operation for supplying the component storage member to the component supply device, wherein the work target specifying unit is a work area in which a component supply target device that is a component supply device capable of performing the component supply operation is disposed. May be specified as the work target area.
  • the automatic guided vehicle moves toward the work target area and stops.
  • the worker can move using the automatic guided vehicle as a mark, and can perform a component supply operation for the component supply device in the work target area at the position where the automatic guided vehicle is stopped.
  • the work plan management apparatus monitors the progress status of all the setup operations performed in each of the work target areas specified by the work target specifying unit, and the progress status is a work
  • the configuration may further include a work progress determination unit that determines whether the status is start, work end, or work not performed. And the said movement control part performs the said guidance movement process based on the determination result by the said work progress determination part.
  • the movement control unit is configured to make progress in all setup work in the work target area in a state where the vehicle body is stopped in the work target area in which the setup work in which the work has not been performed exists.
  • the situation is the end of the work, or when the progress status other than one setup work is the work end and the progress status of the one setup work is the start of the work,
  • region which becomes may be sufficient.
  • the worker moves to the next work target area using the automatic guided vehicle as a mark after completing all the setup work to be performed in the work target area where the automatic guided vehicle is stopped. Can do. Thereby, it can suppress as much as possible that the setup work in the state where work is not performed remains and accumulates.
  • a time limit for starting work is set for the setup work, and the movement control unit determines that there is a priority work that is a setup work for which work start should be prioritized based on the time limit.
  • the vehicle body part When the vehicle body part is recognized, the vehicle body part may be moved and stopped toward the work target area corresponding to the priority work regardless of the progress of the setup work in the work target area where the vehicle body is stopped. .
  • the automatic guided vehicle when there is a priority work whose work start time is approaching, the automatic guided vehicle is stopped toward the work target area where the priority work should be performed. By moving the automatic guided vehicle to the work target area where the vehicle is stopped, the worker can perform priority work.
  • a standard work time required from work start to work end is set for each work type in the setup work, and the movement control unit includes setup work that has not been performed. Based on the number of work for each work type of the setup work and the work standard time in a state where the vehicle body is stopped in the work target area, the allowable stay time of the vehicle body part in the work target area is calculated. When the allowable stay time has elapsed, the vehicle body may be moved and stopped toward the work target area as the next destination.
  • the automatic guided vehicle sequentially moves to the work target area and stops on the basis of the elapse of the allowable stay time based on the work standard time set individually for each setup work.
  • the worker can carry out the setup work by using the allowable stay time during which the automatic guided vehicle is stopped as a guideline for the total work time required to complete all the setup work in the work target area. it can. For this reason, the worker can carry out the setup work in each work target area using the movement and stop periods of the automated guided vehicle as work periods.
  • the automatic guided vehicle measures a remaining time until the stop time of the vehicle body portion reaches the allowable stay time, and when the remaining time reaches a predetermined threshold value, the fact is indicated.
  • report may be sufficient.
  • the worker can perform the setup work in each work target area using the notification by the notification unit as a guide.
  • the work plan management device further includes a first information acquisition unit that acquires from the component mounter work start availability information indicating whether work start can be performed on the setup work that has not been performed. It may be a configuration. Then, the movement control unit determines whether the setup work can be started in the work target area as the next movement destination based on the work start availability information while the vehicle body part is stopped. If the setup work cannot be started, the movement of the vehicle body to the work target area is not permitted, and the vehicle body is put on standby until the setup work can be started.
  • the worker can recognize that it is impossible to start the setup work in the next work target area by recognizing the state where the automatic guided vehicle is waiting.
  • the work plan management device further includes a second information acquisition unit that acquires, from the component mounter, emergency request information indicating a request for performing an emergency operation on the component mounter. There may be.
  • the movement control unit recognizes the presence of the emergency work based on the emergency request information, the emergency control information is output regardless of the progress of the setup work in the work target area where the vehicle body is stopped. The vehicle body is moved toward the work area of the component mounter and stopped.
  • the automatic guided vehicle when there is an emergency work different from the setup work, the automatic guided vehicle is stopped to the work area of the component mounting machine on which the emergency work is to be performed.
  • the worker can carry out emergency work by moving to the work area where the automatic guided vehicle is stopped.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Operations Research (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Supply And Installment Of Electrical Components (AREA)

Abstract

In this component mounting system (1), the planning of an arrangement operation within a work area (WA) having been set for each component mounting machine (2) in a component mounting line (2L) is managed by an operation planning management device (3), and an unmanned transport vehicle (6) moves along a moving route (6R) passing through the work areas (WA). For each of the work areas (WA), an operation target specifying unit (3421) of the operation planning management device (3) specifies an operation target area that is an area for which an operator (OP) is to perform the arrangement operation. With goods (G) to be arranged through the arrangement operation being disposed in a cargo platform unit (62) of the unmanned transport vehicle (6), the vehicle moves to and stops at each of the operation target areas sequentially while providing guidance to the operator (OP).

Description

部品実装システムComponent mounting system
　本発明は、基板に部品を搭載し部品搭載基板を生産する部品実装機が複数連結された部品実装ラインを備えた部品実装システムに関する。 The present invention relates to a component mounting system including a component mounting line in which a plurality of component mounting machines that mount components on a substrate and produce a component mounting substrate are connected.
　プリント配線板等の基板上に電子部品（以下、単に「部品」という）が搭載された部品搭載基板を生産する部品実装ラインは、部品を基板上に搭載する複数の部品実装機を連結して構成されている。各部品実装機には、部品を供給するための部品供給装置が複数並設されている。部品実装ラインの各部品実装機による部品搭載基板の生産に際しては、基板品種ごとの生産計画に基づいて、部品供給装置に部品を補給する部品補給作業等の段取り作業が作業者によって行われる。 A component mounting line that produces a component mounting board in which electronic components (hereinafter simply referred to as “components”) are mounted on a printed wiring board or the like, connects a plurality of component mounting machines that mount components on the substrate. It is configured. Each component mounter is provided with a plurality of component supply devices for supplying components. When a component mounting board is produced by each component mounting machine in the component mounting line, an operator performs a setup operation such as a component replenishment operation for replenishing a component supply device based on a production plan for each substrate type.
　作業者による部品補給作業の効率化を図るための技術が、例えば特許文献１に開示されている。特許文献１に開示される技術では、スプライシングユニットの位置を検出し、その検出した位置に基づき部品補給作業の対象となる部品供給装置（テープフィーダー）を特定する。これにより、作業者は、部品補給作業の対象となる部品供給装置の位置を確認することができる。 A technique for improving the efficiency of parts replenishment work by an operator is disclosed in Patent Document 1, for example. In the technique disclosed in Patent Document 1, the position of the splicing unit is detected, and a component supply device (tape feeder) that is a target of component supply work is specified based on the detected position. Thereby, the operator can confirm the position of the component supply apparatus used as the object of component replenishment work.
特開２０１７－２２４７２０号公報JP 2017-224720 A
　ところで、部品実装ラインの各部品実装機による部品搭載基板の生産の際に行われる、部品補給作業等の段取り作業のタイミングは、各部品実装機において均一ではなく、部品実装機ごとに異なっている。つまり、ある作業タイミングにおいて、段取り作業の対象となる部品実装機と、段取り作業の対象外となる部品実装機とが存在する。このため、作業者は、部品実装ライン上の複数の部品実装機のうち、段取り作業の対象となる部品実装機を把握することが困難であり、どの部品実装機に向かって移動すればよいのか分からず、複数の部品実装機間を右往左往することになってしまう。この結果、作業者の段取り作業に遅れが生じ、その段取り作業の遅れに起因して部品搭載基板の生産効率が低下する虞がある。 By the way, the timing of setup work such as component replenishment work that is performed during production of a component mounting board by each component mounting machine in the component mounting line is not uniform in each component mounting machine, and is different for each component mounting machine. . That is, at a certain work timing, there are a component mounter that is a target of the setup work and a component mounter that is not a target of the setup work. For this reason, it is difficult for the worker to grasp the component mounter that is the target of the setup work among the plurality of component mounters on the component mount line, and which component mounter should be moved to? I don't know, and I will go back and forth between multiple component mounters. As a result, there is a delay in the operator's setup work, and the production efficiency of the component mounting board may be reduced due to the delay in the setup work.
　本発明は、このような事情に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的とするところは、部品実装ラインの各部品実装機による部品搭載基板の生産に際し、作業者による段取り作業の効率化を図ることが可能な部品実装システムを提供することにある。 The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the efficiency of setup work by an operator when producing a component mounting board by each component mounting machine of a component mounting line. It is to provide a component mounting system capable of performing the above.
　本発明の一の局面に係る部品実装システムは、基板に部品を搭載し部品搭載基板を生産する部品実装機が複数連結された部品実装ラインと、前記複数の部品実装機の各々に予め設定された作業領域内における、前記部品搭載基板の生産に応じて作業者が実施すべき段取り作業の計画を管理する作業計画管理装置と、前記各作業領域を通る所定の移動経路に沿って自動的に移動可能な無人搬送車と、を備える。前記作業計画管理装置は、前記各作業領域のうち、前記作業者による前記段取り作業の作業対象となる作業対象領域を特定する作業対象特定部を含む。前記無人搬送車は、前記段取り作業用の物品を収容する荷台部を有する車体部と、前記作業者を誘導するように前記車体部を前記作業対象領域に順次移動させて停車させる誘導移動処理を実行する移動制御部と、を含む。 A component mounting system according to one aspect of the present invention is preset in each of a component mounting line in which a plurality of component mounting machines for mounting a component on a board and producing a component mounting board are connected, and each of the plurality of component mounting machines. A work plan management device for managing a plan of a setup work to be performed by an operator in accordance with production of the component mounting board in the work area, and automatically along a predetermined movement path passing through each work area. A movable automatic guided vehicle. The work plan management apparatus includes a work target specifying unit that specifies a work target area that is a work target of the setup work by the worker among the work areas. The automatic guided vehicle has a vehicle body portion having a loading platform portion that accommodates the set-up work article, and a guided movement process in which the vehicle body portion is sequentially moved to the work target area so as to guide the worker. A movement control unit to be executed.
　本発明の目的、特徴及び利点は、以下の詳細な説明と添付図面とによって、より明白となる。 The objects, features and advantages of the present invention will become more apparent from the following detailed description and the accompanying drawings.
本発明の一実施形態に係る部品実装システムの構成を概略的に示す図である。1 is a diagram schematically showing a configuration of a component mounting system according to an embodiment of the present invention. 部品実装機の構成を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the structure of a component mounting machine. 部品実装機の部品供給部に配置される部品供給装置としてのテープフィーダーを概略的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows schematically the tape feeder as a component supply apparatus arrange | positioned at the component supply part of a component mounting machine. テープフィーダーに装着される部品収納テープを示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the components storage tape with which a tape feeder is mounted | worn. 部品実装機の部品供給部に配置される部品供給装置としてのトレイフィーダーを概略的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows roughly the tray feeder as a component supply apparatus arrange | positioned at the component supply part of a component mounting machine. 部品実装機の部品供給部に配置される部品供給装置としてのスティックフィーダーを概略的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows schematically the stick feeder as a component supply apparatus arrange | positioned at the component supply part of a component mounting machine. 部品実装機の制御系を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the control system of a component mounting machine. 実装制御装置の記憶部に記憶される取付情報を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the attachment information memorize | stored in the memory | storage part of a mounting control apparatus. 作業計画管理装置の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a work plan management apparatus. 作業計画管理装置に入力される生産計画情報を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the production plan information input into a work plan management apparatus. 作業計画管理装置に入力される基板情報を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the board | substrate information input into a work plan management apparatus. 作業計画管理装置の制御動作を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the control action of a work plan management apparatus. 作業計画管理装置の作業管理部及び作業進捗判定部により生成される第１作業リスト情報を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st work list information produced | generated by the work management part and work progress determination part of a work plan management apparatus. 無人搬送車の移動制御部により実行される、第１作業リスト情報に基づく誘導移動処理を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the guidance movement process based on 1st work list information performed by the movement control part of an automatic guided vehicle. 作業進捗判定部が優先作業の存在を認識した場合に更新された第２作業リスト情報を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the 2nd work list information updated when the work progress determination part recognizes presence of a priority work. 移動制御部により実行される、第２作業リスト情報に基づく誘導移動処理を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the guidance movement process based on 2nd work list information performed by the movement control part. 作業進捗判定部が段取り作業の開始不可を認識した場合に更新された第３作業リスト情報を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the 3rd work list information updated when the work progress determination part recognizes that the setup work cannot be started. 移動制御部により実行される、第３作業リスト情報に基づく誘導移動処理を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the guidance movement process based on 3rd work list information performed by a movement control part. 作業進捗判定部が緊急作業の存在を認識した場合に更新された第４作業リスト情報を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the 4th work list information updated when the work progress determination part recognizes the presence of emergency work. 移動制御部により実行される、第４作業リスト情報に基づく誘導移動処理を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the guidance movement process based on 4th work list information performed by the movement control part.
　以下、本発明の実施形態に係る部品実装システムについて図面に基づいて説明する。 Hereinafter, a component mounting system according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
　［部品実装システムの全体構成］
　図１は、本発明の一実施形態に係る部品実装システム１の構成を概略的に示す図である。部品実装システム１は、部品実装ライン２Ｌと、作業計画管理装置３と、生産計画管理装置４と、基板情報管理装置５と、無人搬送車６と、作業者が携帯する携帯端末装置７とを備える。部品実装システム１において、部品実装ライン２Ｌを構成する各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０、生産計画管理装置４、基板情報管理装置５、無人搬送車６、及び携帯端末装置７は、作業計画管理装置３とデータ通信可能に接続されている。 [Overall configuration of component mounting system]
FIG. 1 is a diagram schematically showing a configuration of a component mounting system 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. The component mounting system 1 includes a component mounting line 2L, a work plan management device 3, a production plan management device 4, a board information management device 5, an automatic guided vehicle 6, and a portable terminal device 7 carried by an operator. Prepare. In the component mounting system 1, the mounting control device 20, the production plan management device 4, the board information management device 5, the automatic guided vehicle 6, and the portable terminal device 7 of each component mounting machine 2 constituting the component mounting line 2 </ It is connected to the management device 3 so that data communication is possible.
　部品実装ライン２Ｌは、複数の部品実装機２が連結されて構成されている。部品実装ライン２Ｌにおいて、複数の部品実装機２の各々は、部品実装機２間において基板を搬送する連結コンベアによって、直線状に並ぶように連結される。図１に示す例では、部品実装ライン２Ｌにおいて、６台の部品実装機２が連結されている。なお、図１では、１つの部品実装ライン２Ｌのみを図示しているが、部品実装システム１は、複数の部品実装ライン２Ｌを備えた構成であってもよい。 The component mounting line 2L is configured by connecting a plurality of component mounting machines 2. In the component mounting line 2 </ b> L, each of the plurality of component mounting machines 2 is connected so as to be arranged in a straight line by a connecting conveyor that conveys a substrate between the component mounting machines 2. In the example shown in FIG. 1, six component mounters 2 are connected in the component mounting line 2L. In FIG. 1, only one component mounting line 2L is illustrated, but the component mounting system 1 may be configured to include a plurality of component mounting lines 2L.
　＜部品実装機の構成＞
　まず、図２を参照して部品実装機２の構成を説明する。図２は、部品実装機２の構成を示す平面図である。なお、以下では、方向関係についてはＸＹ直交座標軸を用いて説明する。Ｘ軸方向の一方向側を「＋Ｘ側」と称し、Ｘ軸方向の一方向側とは反対の他方向側を「－Ｘ側」と称する。また、Ｙ軸方向の一方向側を「＋Ｙ側」と称し、Ｙ軸方向の一方向側とは反対の他方向側を「－Ｙ側」と称する。 <Configuration of component mounter>
First, the configuration of the component mounter 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing the configuration of the component mounter 2. In the following, the directional relationship will be described using XY orthogonal coordinate axes. One direction side in the X axis direction is referred to as “+ X side”, and the other direction side opposite to the one direction side in the X axis direction is referred to as “−X side”. One direction side in the Y axis direction is referred to as “+ Y side”, and the other direction side opposite to the one direction side in the Y axis direction is referred to as “−Y side”.
　部品実装機２は、基板Ｐに部品を搭載して部品搭載基板を生産する装置である。なお、部品実装機２による部品の搭載前において基板Ｐには、半田ペーストのパターンが印刷されている。つまり、部品実装機２は、パターン形成装置により半田ペーストのパターンが印刷された基板Ｐに部品を搭載する。部品実装機２は、本体フレーム２１と、移動フレーム２２と、コンベア２３と、部品供給部２４と、ヘッドユニット２５と、第１駆動機構２６と、第２駆動機構２７と、基板支持装置２８とを備える。 The component mounting machine 2 is a device that mounts components on the substrate P to produce a component mounting substrate. Note that a solder paste pattern is printed on the substrate P before mounting the components by the component mounting machine 2. That is, the component mounter 2 mounts the component on the board P on which the pattern of the solder paste is printed by the pattern forming apparatus. The component mounter 2 includes a main body frame 21, a moving frame 22, a conveyor 23, a component supply unit 24, a head unit 25, a first drive mechanism 26, a second drive mechanism 27, and a board support device 28. Is provided.
　本体フレーム２１は、部品実装機２を構成する各部が配置される構造体であり、Ｘ軸方向及びＹ軸方向の両方向と直交する方向から見た平面視で略矩形状に形成されている。コンベア２３は、Ｘ軸方向に延び、本体フレーム２１に配置される。コンベア２３は、基板ＰをＸ軸方向に搬送する。コンベア２３上を搬送される基板Ｐは、所定の作業位置（基板Ｐ上に部品が搭載される部品搭載位置）に、基板支持装置２８によって位置決めされるようになっている。基板支持装置２８は、バックアップピンにより基板Ｐを支持することにより、当該基板Ｐを位置決めする。 The main body frame 21 is a structure in which each part constituting the component mounting machine 2 is arranged, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view as viewed from a direction orthogonal to both the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. The conveyor 23 extends in the X-axis direction and is disposed on the main body frame 21. The conveyor 23 conveys the substrate P in the X-axis direction. The substrate P transported on the conveyor 23 is positioned by a substrate support device 28 at a predetermined work position (a component mounting position where components are mounted on the substrate P). The substrate support device 28 positions the substrate P by supporting the substrate P with the backup pins.
　部品供給部２４は、本体フレーム２１におけるＹ軸方向の＋Ｙ側及び－Ｙ側の領域部分にそれぞれ、Ｘ軸方向に２箇所ずつ合計４箇所に配置される。部品供給部２４は、基板Ｐに搭載される部品を供給するものであり、複数の部品供給装置が並設される。部品供給部２４に配置される部品供給装置については後述する。 The component supply unit 24 is arranged in a total of four locations, two in the X-axis direction, in each of the region portions on the + Y side and −Y side in the Y-axis direction of the main body frame 21. The component supply unit 24 supplies components mounted on the board P, and a plurality of component supply devices are arranged in parallel. The component supply device arranged in the component supply unit 24 will be described later.
　移動フレーム２２は、Ｘ軸方向に延び、本体フレーム２１に、所定の移動方向（Ｙ軸方向）に移動可能に支持される。この移動フレーム２２にヘッドユニット２５が搭載されている。ヘッドユニット２５は、Ｘ軸方向に移動可能となるように、移動フレーム２２に搭載される。すなわち、ヘッドユニット２５は、移動フレーム２２の移動に伴ってＹ軸方向に移動可能であり、且つ、移動フレーム２２に沿ってＸ軸方向に移動可能である。ヘッドユニット２５は、部品供給部２４とコンベア２３により搬送された基板Ｐの所定の作業位置とにわたって移動可能とされ、部品供給部２４から部品を取り出すとともに、その取り出した部品を基板Ｐ上に搭載（実装）する。ヘッドユニット２５は、吸着ノズル２５１を備えている。吸着ノズル２５１は、部品供給部２４により供給された部品を吸着して保持可能な保持具である。吸着ノズル２５１は、電動切替弁を介して負圧発生装置、正圧発生装置及び大気の何れかに連通可能とされている。つまり、吸着ノズル２５１に負圧が供給されることで当該吸着ノズル２５１による部品の吸着保持（部品の取り出し）が可能となり、その後、正圧が供給されることで当該部品の吸着保持が解除される。 The moving frame 22 extends in the X-axis direction and is supported by the main body frame 21 so as to be movable in a predetermined moving direction (Y-axis direction). A head unit 25 is mounted on the moving frame 22. The head unit 25 is mounted on the moving frame 22 so as to be movable in the X-axis direction. That is, the head unit 25 can move in the Y-axis direction as the moving frame 22 moves, and can move in the X-axis direction along the moving frame 22. The head unit 25 is movable over a predetermined working position of the substrate P conveyed by the component supply unit 24 and the conveyor 23, and removes the component from the component supply unit 24 and mounts the extracted component on the substrate P. (Implement. The head unit 25 includes a suction nozzle 251. The suction nozzle 251 is a holder that can suck and hold a component supplied by the component supply unit 24. The suction nozzle 251 can communicate with any of a negative pressure generator, a positive pressure generator, and the atmosphere via an electric switching valve. That is, by supplying a negative pressure to the suction nozzle 251, it is possible to hold the component by the suction nozzle 251 (removal of the component), and then, by supplying a positive pressure, the suction holding of the component is released. The
　第１駆動機構２６は、本体フレーム２１の＋Ｘ側及び－Ｘ側の端部に配設される。第１駆動機構２６は、移動フレーム２２をＹ軸方向に移動させる機構である。第１駆動機構２６は、例えば、駆動モーターと、Ｙ軸方向に延び、駆動モーターに連結されるボールねじ軸と、移動フレーム２２に配設されてボールねじ軸と螺合するボールナットと、を含んで構成される。このような構成の第１駆動機構２６は、駆動モーターによるボールねじ軸の回転駆動に伴ってボールナットがボールねじ軸に沿って進退することにより、移動フレーム２２をＹ軸方向に移動させる。 The first drive mechanism 26 is disposed at the + X side and −X side ends of the main body frame 21. The first drive mechanism 26 is a mechanism that moves the moving frame 22 in the Y-axis direction. The first drive mechanism 26 includes, for example, a drive motor, a ball screw shaft that extends in the Y-axis direction and is coupled to the drive motor, and a ball nut that is disposed on the moving frame 22 and is screwed with the ball screw shaft. Consists of including. The first drive mechanism 26 having such a configuration moves the moving frame 22 in the Y-axis direction when the ball nut advances and retreats along the ball screw shaft as the ball screw shaft is driven to rotate by the drive motor.
　第２駆動機構２７は、移動フレーム２２に配設される。第２駆動機構２７は、ヘッドユニット２５を移動フレーム２２に沿ったＸ軸方向に移動させる機構である。第２駆動機構２７は、第１駆動機構２６と同様に、例えば、駆動モーターと、Ｘ軸方向に延び、駆動モーターに連結されるボールねじ軸と、ヘッドユニット２５に配設されてボールねじ軸と螺合するボールナットと、を含んで構成される。このような構成の第２駆動機構２７は、駆動モーターによるボールねじ軸の回転駆動に伴ってボールナットがボールねじ軸に沿って進退することにより、ヘッドユニット２５をＸ軸方向に移動させる。 The second drive mechanism 27 is disposed on the moving frame 22. The second drive mechanism 27 is a mechanism that moves the head unit 25 in the X-axis direction along the moving frame 22. Similar to the first drive mechanism 26, the second drive mechanism 27 is, for example, a drive motor, a ball screw shaft extending in the X-axis direction and coupled to the drive motor, and the head unit 25. And a ball nut screwed together. The second drive mechanism 27 having such a configuration moves the head unit 25 in the X-axis direction as the ball nut advances and retreats along the ball screw shaft as the ball screw shaft is driven to rotate by the drive motor.
　＜部品供給装置について＞
　部品供給部２４に並設される部品供給装置は、部品供給方式の違いにより、テープフィーダー、トレイフィーダー及びスティックフィーダーに大別される。部品実装機２の各部品供給部２４には、部品供給方式が同一の１種の部品供給装置が配置されていてもよいし、部品供給方式が異なる２種以上の部品供給装置がそれぞれ配置されていてもよい。 <About parts supply equipment>
The component supply devices arranged in parallel in the component supply unit 24 are roughly classified into a tape feeder, a tray feeder, and a stick feeder depending on the difference in the component supply method. Each component supply unit 24 of the component mounter 2 may be provided with one type of component supply device having the same component supply method, or two or more types of component supply devices having different component supply methods. It may be.
　（テープフィーダー）
　まず、部品供給装置としてのテープフィーダーは、部品収納部材としてのリールに、部品を所定間隔おきに収納した部品収納テープが巻回され、そのリールから部品収納テープが送出されるように構成されている。テープフィーダーは、一般的に、スプライシングフィーダーと自動ローディングフィーダー（ＡＦ）とに大別される。スプライシングフィーダーは、１本のリールが装着されるように構成されており、そのリールからの部品収納テープの送出が完了して部品切れになる前に、当該部品収納テープから後続の部品収納テープへと移行させるために、先行する部品収納テープの末端部と後続の部品収納テープの先端部との間をスプライシングテープ等で貼り付けて両者を接続する。すなわち、スプライシングフィーダーでは、１本のリールからの部品収納テープの送出が完了して部品切れになる前に、スプライシングテープ等で貼り付けるスプライシング作業が行われるので、後続の部品収納テープが巻回されたリールの補給タイミングは、先行の部品収納テープの送出が完了した時点に拘束される。 (Tape feeder)
First, a tape feeder as a component supply device is configured such that a component storage tape storing components at predetermined intervals is wound around a reel as a component storage member, and the component storage tape is delivered from the reel. Yes. In general, the tape feeder is roughly classified into a splicing feeder and an automatic loading feeder (AF). The splicing feeder is configured so that one reel is mounted, and before the component storage tape is sent out from the reel and the component is cut out, the component storage tape is transferred to the subsequent component storage tape. In order to make the transition, the end portion of the preceding component storage tape and the leading end portion of the subsequent component storage tape are attached with a splicing tape or the like to connect them. That is, in the splicing feeder, the splicing work to be applied with the splicing tape or the like is performed before the parts storage tape from one reel is completed and the parts are cut, so that the subsequent part storage tape is wound. The reel supply timing is constrained at the time when the delivery of the preceding component storage tape is completed.
　一方、ＡＦは、複数のリールが装着可能に構成されており、複数のリールのうち、部品供給が先行して行われる部品収納テープ（以下、「先行の部品収納テープ」という）が巻回された先行のリールからの部品収納テープの送出が完了すると、ＡＦに挿入済みの後続する部品収納テープがあればスプライシング作業を行うことなく自動的に、後続する部品収納テープが巻回された後続のリールから部品収納テープが送出される。すなわち、ＡＦにおいて、新たなリールの補給タイミングは、先行の部品収納テープが巻回された先行のリールからの部品収納テープの送出が完了した時点に拘束されることなく、ＡＦに後続する部品収納テープを挿入可能な状態であればいつでも部品補給作業を行うことができるため、スプライシングフィーダーに比べて自由度がある。 On the other hand, the AF is configured so that a plurality of reels can be mounted, and among the plurality of reels, a component storage tape (hereinafter referred to as “preceding component storage tape”) in which component supply is performed in advance is wound. When the delivery of the component storage tape from the preceding reel is completed, if there is a subsequent component storage tape already inserted in the AF, the subsequent component storage tape is automatically wound without splicing. The component storage tape is sent out from the reel. That is, in AF, the supply timing of a new reel is not restricted to the time when the delivery of the component storage tape from the preceding reel on which the preceding component storage tape is wound is completed, and the component storage following the AF is stored. Since parts can be replenished at any time as long as the tape can be inserted, there is a degree of freedom compared to the splicing feeder.
　本実施形態では、部品供給部２４に配置されるテープフィーダーとしては、スプライシングフィーダーとＡＦとが混在しても構わないが、部品収納部材としてのリールを複数装着可能なＡＦが、部品供給装置として複数配置されている。この部品供給装置としてのＡＦからなるテープフィーダーについて、図３及び図４を参照して説明する。図３はＡＦ２４１の構成を概略的に示す図であり、図４はＡＦ２４１に装着される部品収納テープ２４３を示す斜視図である。 In the present embodiment, splicing feeders and AF may be mixed as tape feeders arranged in the component supply unit 24, but an AF that can mount a plurality of reels as component storage members is used as the component supply device. Several are arranged. A tape feeder made of AF as the component supply apparatus will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the AF 241, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a component storage tape 243 mounted on the AF 241.
　部品供給部２４においてＡＦ２４１は、台車２４２に配置される。ＡＦ２４１は、部品収納テープ２４３が巻回された複数のリール２４２０を装着可能である。 In the component supply unit 24, the AF 241 is disposed on the carriage 242. The AF 241 can mount a plurality of reels 2420 around which the component storage tape 243 is wound.
　ＡＦ２４１の構成を説明するに先立って、図４を参照して部品収納テープ２４３を説明する。部品収納テープ２４３は、キャリアテープ２４３１とカバーテープ２４３４とからなる。キャリアテープ２４３１は、部品Ｅを収納する部品収納部２４３３が所定の間隔をおいて複数配列されたテープである。また、キャリアテープ２４３１には、その幅方向一端部に、後述するＡＦ２４１における第１スプロケット２４１２Ａ及び第２スプロケット２４１３Ａの歯部と嵌合し、第１スプロケット２４１２Ａ及び第２スプロケット２４１３Ａにより部品収納テープ２４３を送出させるための搬送力が伝達される搬送力伝達孔２４３２が所定の間隔を有して配列されている。カバーテープ２４３４は、部品収納部２４３３を覆うようにキャリアテープ２４３１に貼付されたテープである。 Prior to describing the configuration of the AF 241, the component storage tape 243 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. The component storage tape 243 includes a carrier tape 2431 and a cover tape 2434. The carrier tape 2431 is a tape in which a plurality of component storage portions 2433 that store the components E are arranged at predetermined intervals. In addition, the carrier tape 2431 is fitted with tooth portions of a first sprocket 2412A and a second sprocket 2413A in an AF 241 described later at one end in the width direction, and the component storage tape 243 is formed by the first sprocket 2412A and the second sprocket 2413A. The conveying force transmission holes 2432 to which the conveying force for sending out is transmitted are arranged with a predetermined interval. The cover tape 2434 is a tape affixed to the carrier tape 2431 so as to cover the component storage unit 2433.
　図３に示すように、ＡＦ２４１は、部品供給部２４に設けられたフィーダー取付部２４１７Ａに取り付けられている。詳しくは、部品供給部２４には、フィーダー取付部２４１７Ａと、リール支持部２４１９とが設けられている。フィーダー取付部２４１７Ａには、Ｘ軸方向に一定間隔で並びかつＹ軸方向に互いに平行に延びる複数のスロット２４１７Ｂと、これらスロット２４１７Ｂよりも前側の位置でＸ軸方向に延びる固定台２４１７Ｃとが設けられている。そして、各スロット２４１７ＢにＡＦ２４１がセットされ、各ＡＦ２４１が固定台２４１７Ｃに固定されている。これにより、部品供給部２４において複数のＡＦ２４１が台車２４２に並設されている。 As shown in FIG. 3, the AF 241 is attached to a feeder attachment portion 2417 </ b> A provided in the component supply portion 24. Specifically, the component supply unit 24 is provided with a feeder mounting portion 2417A and a reel support portion 2419. The feeder mounting portion 2417A is provided with a plurality of slots 2417B arranged at regular intervals in the X-axis direction and extending in parallel with each other in the Y-axis direction, and a fixing base 2417C extending in the X-axis direction at a position in front of these slots 2417B. It has been. The AF 241 is set in each slot 2417B, and each AF 241 is fixed to the fixed base 2417C. As a result, a plurality of AFs 241 are juxtaposed on the carriage 242 in the component supply unit 24.
　リール支持部２４１９は、フィーダー取付部２４１７Ａの後方下側に位置しており、リール２４２０を回転可能に支持する第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａ及び第２リールホルダ２４１９Ｂを、上下方向に互いに離間した状態で支持する。第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａ及び第２リールホルダ２４１９Ｂの各々に支持されるリール２４２０には、部品収納テープ２４３が巻回されている。 The reel support portion 2419 is located on the lower rear side of the feeder mounting portion 2417A, and supports the first reel holder 2419A and the second reel holder 2419B that rotatably support the reel 2420 while being separated from each other in the vertical direction. To do. A component storage tape 243 is wound around a reel 2420 supported by each of the first reel holder 2419A and the second reel holder 2419B.
　ＡＦ２４１は、フィーダー本体２４１１を備えている。ＡＦ２４１は、スロット２４１７Ｂにフィーダー本体２４１１が挿入（セット）された状態で、固定台２４１７Ｃに固定されている。フィーダー本体２４１１には、第１テープ送出部２４１２を構成する第１スプロケット２４１２Ａと、その第１スプロケット２４１２Ａに対してリール支持部２４１９から離れるようにＹ軸方向に離間した、第２テープ送出部２４１３を構成する第２スプロケット２４１３Ａとが、回転可能に支持されている。第１スプロケット２４１２Ａ及び第２スプロケット２４１３Ａはそれぞれ、周方向に所定の間隔を有して配列した複数の歯部を備える。第１スプロケット２４１２Ａ及び第２スプロケット２４１３Ａの歯部は、部品収納テープ２４３のキャリアテープ２４３１に形成された搬送力伝達孔２４３２と嵌合可能である。 The AF 241 includes a feeder main body 2411. The AF 241 is fixed to the fixing base 2417C in a state where the feeder main body 2411 is inserted (set) into the slot 2417B. The feeder main body 2411 includes a first sprocket 2412A constituting the first tape delivery section 2412 and a second tape delivery section 2413 spaced from the reel support section 2419 with respect to the first sprocket 2412A in the Y-axis direction. The second sprocket 2413A that constitutes is supported rotatably. Each of the first sprocket 2412A and the second sprocket 2413A includes a plurality of tooth portions arranged with a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. The tooth portions of the first sprocket 2412 </ b> A and the second sprocket 2413 </ b> A can be fitted into a conveying force transmission hole 2432 formed in the carrier tape 2431 of the component storage tape 243.
　第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａ及び第２リールホルダ２４１９Ｂの各々に支持されるリール２４２０に巻回された部品収納テープ２４３は、リール支持部２４１９の上端に配設されたガイドローラー２４１８にガイドされつつ第１スプロケット２４１２Ａ及び第２スプロケット２４１３Ａに導かれる。搬送力伝達孔２４３２が第１スプロケット２４１２Ａ及び第２スプロケット２４１３Ａの歯部と嵌合された部品収納テープ２４３は、第１スプロケット２４１２Ａ及び第２スプロケット２４１３Ａの回転により送出され、部品供給位置Ｐ１で部品Ｅの取り出しが行われる。 The component storage tape 243 wound around the reel 2420 supported by each of the first reel holder 2419A and the second reel holder 2419B is guided by a guide roller 2418 provided at the upper end of the reel support portion 2419 while being guided by the first reel holder 2419B. It is guided to the sprocket 2412A and the second sprocket 2413A. The component storage tape 243 in which the conveying force transmission hole 2432 is fitted to the teeth of the first sprocket 2412A and the second sprocket 2413A is sent out by the rotation of the first sprocket 2412A and the second sprocket 2413A, and the component is received at the component supply position P1. E is taken out.
　ＡＦ２４１は、更に、フィーダー本体２４１１の後端部に着脱可能に固定されたテープ支持部材２４１４と、フィーダー本体２４１１の後部上面に配置された操作入力部２４１５と、第１、第２テープ検知センサ２４１６Ａ、２４１６Ｂと、を備えている。 The AF 241 further includes a tape support member 2414 detachably fixed to the rear end portion of the feeder main body 2411, an operation input portion 2415 disposed on the upper surface of the rear portion of the feeder main body 2411, and first and second tape detection sensors 2416A. , 2416B.
　テープ支持部材２４１４は、図３に示すように、フィーダー本体２４１１の内部において部品収納テープ２４３が走行するテープ走行通路２４１４Ａの後端部分を、上下の２つの通路（上側通路２４１４ＡＡ、下側通路２４１４ＡＢ）に分けるとともに、上側通路２４１４ＡＡを通過する部品収納テープ２４３を下側から支持するものである。詳しくは、テープ走行通路２４１４Ａの後端部分は、その前方から後方に向かって上下方向に広がる形状とされている。テープ支持部材２４１４は、フィーダー本体２４１１の後方からテープ走行通路２４１４Ａ内に挿入され、当該フィーダー本体２４１１に着脱可能に固定されている。これにより、テープ走行通路２４１４Ａの後端部分が、テープ支持部材２４１４によって上側通路２４１４ＡＡと下側通路２４１４ＡＢとに分けられている。 As shown in FIG. 3, the tape support member 2414 has two upper and lower passages (an upper passage 2414AA and a lower passage 2414AB) in the rear end portion of the tape running passage 2414A in which the component storage tape 243 travels inside the feeder main body 2411. And the component storage tape 243 that passes through the upper passage 2414AA is supported from the lower side. Specifically, the rear end portion of the tape running path 2414A has a shape that expands in the vertical direction from the front to the rear. The tape support member 2414 is inserted into the tape running path 2414A from the rear of the feeder main body 2411, and is detachably fixed to the feeder main body 2411. Thus, the rear end portion of the tape running passage 2414A is divided into an upper passage 2414AA and a lower passage 2414AB by the tape support member 2414.
　第１テープ検知センサ２４１６Ａ及び第２テープ検知センサ２４１６Ｂは、テープ走行通路２４１４Ａに臨む状態で設けられており、テープ走行通路２４１４Ａを通過する部品収納テープ２４３の有無を検出する。より具体的には、第１テープ検知センサ２４１６Ａは、上側通路２４１４ＡＡと下側通路２４１４ＡＢとの合流地点よりも前方であってテープ走行通路２４１４Ａに下方から臨む位置に設けられている。一方、第２テープ検知センサ２４１６Ｂは、上側通路２４１４ＡＡに上方から臨む位置に設けられており、これにより、上側通路２４１４ＡＡにおける部品収納テープ２４３の有無を検知する。 The first tape detection sensor 2416A and the second tape detection sensor 2416B are provided so as to face the tape travel path 2414A, and detect the presence / absence of the component storage tape 243 that passes through the tape travel path 2414A. More specifically, the first tape detection sensor 2416A is provided at a position in front of the junction of the upper passage 2414AA and the lower passage 2414AB and facing the tape travel passage 2414A from below. On the other hand, the second tape detection sensor 2416B is provided at a position facing the upper passage 2414AA from above, and thereby detects the presence or absence of the component storage tape 243 in the upper passage 2414AA.
　操作入力部２４１５は、作業者が必要に応じて部品収納テープ２４３の送出及び逆送を行うものである。 The operation input unit 2415 is for the operator to send and reverse the component storage tape 243 as necessary.
　以上のように構成されるＡＦ２４１の部品供給動作は、次の通りである。まず準備作業として、作業者は、リール支持部２４１９の下段の第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａに先行する部品収納テープ２４３が巻回されたリール２４２０を取り付ける。この際、作業者は、リール２４２０に設けられた部品種特定用バーコードＢＲ（記録部、図３参照）をバーコードリーダ８（図７）で読み取る読取操作を行う。部品種特定用バーコードＢＲは、リール２４２０に巻回された部品収納テープ２４３に収納された部品Ｅの部品種を特定するための補給部品種情報等をコード化して記録されたものである。 The component supply operation of the AF 241 configured as described above is as follows. First, as a preparatory work, the worker attaches a reel 2420 around which a component storage tape 243 preceding the first reel holder 2419A on the lower stage of the reel support portion 2419 is wound. At this time, the operator performs a reading operation of reading the component type specifying barcode BR (recording unit, see FIG. 3) provided on the reel 2420 with the barcode reader 8 (FIG. 7). The component type identification bar code BR is coded and recorded, for example, supply component type information for identifying the component type of the component E stored in the component storage tape 243 wound around the reel 2420.
　作業者は、第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａに取り付けたリール２４２０に巻回された部品収納テープ２４３の先端部をフィーダー本体２４１１の後方から上側通路２４１４ＡＡに挿入する。これにより、先行する部品収納テープ２４３の先端部は、第１スプロケット２４１２Ａと嵌合された状態で、テープ支持部材２４１４により支持される。その後、作業者は、操作入力部２４１５を操作し、第１スプロケット２４１２Ａを回転させる指示を入力して部品収納テープ２４３を送出させ、部品供給テープ２４３の先端部を第２スプロケット２４１３Ａと嵌合させる。 The worker inserts the tip of the component storage tape 243 wound around the reel 2420 attached to the first reel holder 2419A into the upper passage 2414AA from the rear of the feeder body 2411. As a result, the leading end of the preceding component storage tape 243 is supported by the tape support member 2414 in a state of being fitted to the first sprocket 2412A. Thereafter, the operator operates the operation input unit 2415, inputs an instruction to rotate the first sprocket 2412A, sends the component storage tape 243, and fits the tip of the component supply tape 243 with the second sprocket 2413A. .
　上記の準備作業が終了した状態で、ＡＦ２４１の部品供給動作が開始される。ＡＦ２４１において、第２スプロケット２４１３Ａは回転し、これにより部品収納テープ２４３を送出する。なお、第１スプロケット２４１２Ａは空転するように構成されており、このとき、第２スプロケット２４１３Ａを回転させるのみで部品収納テープ２４３を送出することができる。 The part supply operation of the AF 241 is started in the state where the above preparation work is completed. In the AF 241, the second sprocket 2413 </ b> A rotates, thereby feeding the component storage tape 243. Note that the first sprocket 2412A is configured to idle, and at this time, the component storage tape 243 can be delivered only by rotating the second sprocket 2413A.
　次に、リール２４２０から先行する部品収納テープ２４３が送出されている状態で、作業者は、フィーダー本体２４１１からテープ支持部材２４１４を取り外す。テープ支持部材２４１４が取り外されると、部品収納テープ２４３がその自重によってテープ走行通路２４１４Ａ底面部に変位する。これにより、先行する部品収納テープ２４３の第１スプロケット２４１２Ａとの嵌合が解除される。このとき、部品収納テープテープ２４３は、第２スプロケット２４１３Ａと嵌合されているので、第１スプロケット２４１２Ａとの嵌合が解除されても、第２スプロケット２４１３Ａの回転により送出され続ける。 Next, the operator removes the tape support member 2414 from the feeder main body 2411 while the preceding component storage tape 243 is being fed from the reel 2420. When the tape support member 2414 is removed, the component storage tape 243 is displaced to the bottom surface of the tape travel path 2414A by its own weight. Thereby, the fitting of the preceding component storage tape 243 with the first sprocket 2412A is released. At this time, since the component storage tape 243 is fitted to the second sprocket 2413A, the component storage tape tape 243 continues to be sent out by the rotation of the second sprocket 2413A even if the fitting with the first sprocket 2412A is released.
　次に、リール２４２０から先行する部品収納テープ２４３が送出されている状態で、作業者は、テープ支持部材２４１４をフィーダー本体２４１１に装着し、先行する部品収納テープ２４３が巻回されたリール２４２０を下段の第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａから上段の第２リールホルダ２４１９Ｂに移動させる。次に、上段の第２リールホルダ２４１９Ｂに支持されたリール２４２０から先行する部品収納テープ２４３が送出されている状態で、作業者は、後続する部品収納テープ２４３が巻回されたリール２４２０を下段の第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａに取り付け、その部品収納テープ２４３の先端部をフィーダー本体２４１１の後方から上側通路２４１４ＡＡに挿入する。これにより、後続する部品収納テープ２４３の先端部は、第１スプロケット２４１２と嵌合された状態で、テープ支持部材２４１４により支持される。このようにして、リール２４２０に巻回される先行の部品収納テープ２４３の部品切れが発生していない状態で、後続の部品収納テープ２４３が巻回されたリール２４２０を装着することができる。なお、後続の部品収納テープ２４３が巻回されたリール２４２０を装着する際も、先行の部品収納テープ２４３の場合と同様に、作業者は、リール２４２０に設けられた部品種特定用バーコードＢＲをバーコードリーダ８（図７）で読み取る読取操作を行う。 Next, in a state where the preceding component storage tape 243 is being delivered from the reel 2420, the operator attaches the tape support member 2414 to the feeder main body 2411, and removes the reel 2420 around which the preceding component storage tape 243 is wound. Move from the lower first reel holder 2419A to the upper second reel holder 2419B. Next, in a state where the preceding component storage tape 243 is being fed from the reel 2420 supported by the upper second reel holder 2419B, the operator lowers the reel 2420 around which the subsequent component storage tape 243 is wound. Is attached to the first reel holder 2419A, and the tip of the component storage tape 243 is inserted into the upper passage 2414AA from the rear of the feeder main body 2411. As a result, the leading end of the subsequent component storage tape 243 is supported by the tape support member 2414 in a state of being fitted to the first sprocket 2412. In this manner, the reel 2420 around which the subsequent component storage tape 243 is wound can be mounted in a state in which the component shortage of the previous component storage tape 243 wound around the reel 2420 has not occurred. Note that when the reel 2420 around which the subsequent component storage tape 243 is wound is mounted, the operator can also specify the component type specifying barcode BR provided on the reel 2420 as in the case of the previous component storage tape 243. Is read by the barcode reader 8 (FIG. 7).
　その後、上段の第２リールホルダ２４１９Ｂに支持されたリール２４２０から、先行する部品収納テープ２４３が全て引き出され、その後端が第２テープ検知センサ２４１６Ｂの位置を通過して、先行する部品収納テープ２４３が無いことが検知されると、下段の第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａに支持されたリール２４２０からの、後続する部品収納テープ２４３の送出が自動的に開始される。そして、作業者は、部品切れとなったリール２４２０を上段の第２リールホルダ２４１９Ｂから取り外し、後続する部品収納テープ２４３が巻回されたリール２４２０を下段の第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａから上段の第２リールホルダ２４１９Ｂに移動させる。このとき、作業者は、部品収納テープ２４３が巻回された新たなリールを、ＡＦ２４１に対して補給することができる。ＡＦ２４１に対して補給された新たなリールは、作業者によって下段の第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａに取り付けられる。この際にも、作業者は、新たなリールに設けられた部品種特定用バーコードをバーコードリーダ８で読み取る読取操作を行う。ここで、新たなリールの部品補給作業のタイミングは、先行する部品収納テープ２４３が巻回されたリール２４２０が部品切れとなる時点に拘束されることはなく、作業計画管理装置３によって特定される。 Thereafter, the preceding component storage tape 243 is all pulled out from the reel 2420 supported by the upper second reel holder 2419B, and the rear end thereof passes through the position of the second tape detection sensor 2416B. When it is detected that there is no component, feeding of the subsequent component storage tape 243 from the reel 2420 supported by the lower first reel holder 2419A is automatically started. Then, the operator removes the reel 2420 having run out of parts from the upper second reel holder 2419B, and removes the reel 2420 around which the subsequent component storage tape 243 is wound from the lower first reel holder 2419A to the second upper reel. Move to reel holder 2419B. At this time, the operator can replenish the AF 241 with a new reel on which the component storage tape 243 is wound. The new reel supplied to the AF 241 is attached to the lower first reel holder 2419A by the operator. Also at this time, the operator performs a reading operation of reading the barcode for identifying the component type provided on the new reel by the barcode reader 8. Here, the timing of the new reel component replenishment operation is not restricted by the time when the reel 2420 around which the preceding component storage tape 243 is wound runs out of components, and is specified by the operation plan management device 3. .
　なお、上段の第２リールホルダ２４１９Ｂに支持されたリール２４２０から先行する部品収納テープ２４３が送出され、下段の第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａに支持されたリール２４２０に巻回された後続する部品収納テープ２４３の先端部が上側通路２４１４ＡＡに挿入された状態では、新たなリールの装着が不能である。一方、上段の第２リールホルダ２４１９Ｂに支持されたリール２４２０から、先行する部品収納テープ２４３が全て引き出され、下段の第１リールホルダ２４１９Ａに支持されたリール２４２０からの、後続する部品収納テープ２４３の送出が自動的に開始された状態では、新たなリールの装着が可能である。 The preceding component storage tape 243 is delivered from the reel 2420 supported by the upper second reel holder 2419B, and the subsequent component storage tape 243 wound around the reel 2420 supported by the lower first reel holder 2419A. In the state in which the tip of this is inserted into the upper passage 2414AA, it is impossible to mount a new reel. On the other hand, the preceding component storage tape 243 is all drawn out from the reel 2420 supported by the upper second reel holder 2419B, and the subsequent component storage tape 243 from the reel 2420 supported by the lower first reel holder 2419A. In the state in which the delivery of the machine is automatically started, a new reel can be mounted.
　（トレイフィーダー）
　次に、部品供給装置としてのトレイフィーダーについて、図５を参照して説明する。図５は、トレイフィーダー２４５の構成を概略的に示す図である。部品供給部２４には、複数のトレイフィーダー２４５が並設可能である。トレイフィーダー２４５は、１つのマガジン２４５３がカバー体２４５１内を上下方向に移動可能に構成されている。このマガジン２４５３には、複数の第１パレット２４５４と、複数の第２パレット２４５５と、複数の第３パレット２４５６とが収容されている。 (Tray feeder)
Next, a tray feeder as a component supply device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the tray feeder 245. A plurality of tray feeders 245 can be juxtaposed in the component supply unit 24. The tray feeder 245 is configured such that one magazine 2453 can move in the vertical direction within the cover body 2451. In this magazine 2453, a plurality of first pallets 2454, a plurality of second pallets 2455, and a plurality of third pallets 2456 are accommodated.
　各第１パレット２４５４には、複数の部品が保持された少なくとも１つの第１トレイＴＲ１が載置されている。第１トレイＴＲ１に保持される部品は、第１パレット２４５４ごとに同じ種類の部品である。同様に、各第２パレット２４５５には、複数の部品が保持された少なくとも１つの第２トレイＴＲ２が載置されている。第２トレイＴＲ２に保持される部品は、第２パレット２４５５ごとに同じ種類の部品である。但し、第２トレイＴＲ２に保持される部品は、第１トレイＴＲ１に保持される部品とは種類が異なる。また、各第３パレット２４５６には、複数の部品が保持された少なくとも１つの第３トレイＴＲ３が載置されている。第３トレイＴＲ３に保持される部品は、第３パレット２４５６ごとに同じ種類の部品である。但し、第３トレイＴＲ３に保持される部品は、第１トレイＴＲ１及び第２トレイＴＲ２の各々に保持される部品とは種類が異なる。 Each first pallet 2454 is loaded with at least one first tray TR1 holding a plurality of components. The parts held in the first tray TR1 are the same type of parts for each first pallet 2454. Similarly, on each second pallet 2455, at least one second tray TR2 holding a plurality of components is placed. The parts held in the second tray TR2 are the same type of parts for each second pallet 2455. However, the type of the component held in the second tray TR2 is different from the component held in the first tray TR1. Each third pallet 2456 is loaded with at least one third tray TR3 holding a plurality of components. The parts held in the third tray TR3 are the same type of parts for each third pallet 2456. However, the types of components held on the third tray TR3 are different from the types of components held on the first tray TR1 and the second tray TR2.
　第１パレット２４５４、第２パレット２４５５、及び第３パレット２４５６の各々は、複数の部品が保持されたトレイＴＲ１，ＴＲ２，ＴＲ３が載置される、部品収納部材としての機能を有する。マガジン２４５３に収容された第１パレット２４５４、第２パレット２４５５、及び第３パレット２４５６の各々は、部品搭載基板の生産時に、カバー体２４５１から外方に突出して設けられたテーブル２４５２に移動され、これによってトレイＴＲ１，ＴＲ２，ＴＲ３に保持された状態で部品が供給される。 Each of the first pallet 2454, the second pallet 2455, and the third pallet 2456 has a function as a component storage member on which trays TR1, TR2, and TR3 holding a plurality of components are placed. Each of the first pallet 2454, the second pallet 2455, and the third pallet 2456 accommodated in the magazine 2453 is moved to a table 2452 provided to project outward from the cover body 2451 during the production of the component mounting board. As a result, the components are supplied while being held on the trays TR1, TR2, and TR3.
　部品搭載基板の生産中において、複数の第１パレット２４５４のうちの１つの第１パレット２４５４に載置された第１トレイＴＲ１に保持された部品が部品切れになったとしても、他の第１パレット２４５４がテーブル２４５２に移動され、これによって第１トレイＴＲ１に保持された状態で部品が供給される。このとき、作業者は、部品搭載基板の生産中において、部品切れとなった第１パレット２４５４をカバー体２４５１から取り出し、新たな第１パレットをトレイフィーダー２４５に対して補給することができる。同様に、部品搭載基板の生産中において、複数の第２パレット２４５５のうちの１つの第２パレット２４５５に載置された第２トレイＴＲ２に保持された部品が部品切れになったとしても、他の第２パレット２４５５がテーブル２４５２に移動され、これによって第２トレイＴＲ２に保持された状態で部品が供給される。このとき、作業者は、部品搭載基板の生産中において、部品切れとなった第２パレット２４５５をカバー体２４５１から取り出し、新たな第２パレットをトレイフィーダー２４５に対して補給することができる。また、部品搭載基板の生産中において、複数の第３パレット２４５６のうちの１つの第３パレット２４５６に載置された第３トレイＴＲ３に保持された部品が部品切れになったとしても、他の第３パレット２４５６がテーブル２４５２に移動され、これによって第３トレイＴＲ３に保持された状態で部品が供給される。このとき、作業者は、部品搭載基板の生産中において、部品切れとなった第３パレット２４５６をカバー体２４５１から取り出し、新たな第３パレットをトレイフィーダー２４５に対して補給することができる。 Even if a component held on the first tray TR1 placed on one first pallet 2454 of the plurality of first pallets 2454 is out of components during the production of the component mounting board, the other first The pallet 2454 is moved to the table 2452, so that the parts are supplied while being held on the first tray TR1. At this time, the worker can take out the first pallet 2454 that has run out of components from the cover body 2451 and supply a new first pallet to the tray feeder 245 during the production of the component mounting board. Similarly, even if a component held on the second tray TR2 placed on one second pallet 2455 out of the plurality of second pallets 2455 becomes out of components during the production of the component mounting board, The second pallet 2455 is moved to the table 2452 so that the parts are supplied while being held on the second tray TR2. At this time, the operator can take out the second pallet 2455 out of components from the cover body 2451 during the production of the component mounting board, and replenish the tray feeder 245 with a new second pallet. Further, during the production of the component mounting board, even if the component held on the third tray TR3 placed on one third pallet 2456 of the plurality of third pallets 2456 becomes out of components, The third pallet 2456 is moved to the table 2452 so that the parts are supplied while being held on the third tray TR3. At this time, the worker can take out the third pallet 2456 out of components from the cover body 2451 and supply a new third pallet to the tray feeder 245 during the production of the component mounting board.
　なお、新たなパレットをトレイフィーダー２４５に対して補給する際には、作業者は、新たなパレットに設けられた部品種特定用バーコードをバーコードリーダ８で読み取る読取操作を行う。トレイフィーダー２４５に対する新たなパレットの部品補給作業の計画に関する管理は、作業計画管理装置３によって行われる。 When a new pallet is supplied to the tray feeder 245, the operator performs a reading operation of reading the part type identification barcode provided on the new pallet with the barcode reader 8. The work plan management device 3 performs management related to a new pallet component supply work plan for the tray feeder 245.
　（スティックフィーダー）
　次に、部品供給装置としてのスティックフィーダーについて、図６を参照して説明する。図６は、スティックフィーダー２４６の構成を概略的に示す図である。部品供給部２４には、複数のスティックフィーダー２４６が並設可能である。スティックフィーダー２４６は、筒状の部品収納部材としてのスティック２４６９に収納された部品Ｅを当該スティック２４６９から押し出しながら供給するように構成されている。スティックフィーダー２４６は、フレーム本体２４６１と、このフレーム本体２４６１の上部に設けられたスティックテーブル２４６２、第１チャック２４６３及び第２チャック２４６４と、部品押し出し機構部２４６５と、ガイドフレーム２４６６と、一対のガイドレール２４６７と、搬送ベルト２４６８と、を備える。 (Stick feeder)
Next, a stick feeder as a component supply device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the stick feeder 246. A plurality of stick feeders 246 can be juxtaposed in the component supply unit 24. The stick feeder 246 is configured to supply the component E stored in a stick 2469 as a cylindrical component storage member while being pushed out from the stick 2469. The stick feeder 246 includes a frame main body 2461, a stick table 2462 provided at an upper portion of the frame main body 2461, a first chuck 2463 and a second chuck 2464, a component push-out mechanism 2465, a guide frame 2466, and a pair of guides. A rail 2467 and a conveyor belt 2468 are provided.
　フレーム本体２４６１は、上部が開口した中空箱形の形状を有している。スティックテーブル２４６２は、フレーム本体２４６１の上部内側に配設されている。スティックテーブル２４６２上には、複数のスティック２４６９を積層状態で載置することが可能である。第１チャック２４６３は、スティックテーブル２４６２上の複数のスティック２４６９のうちの最下位以外のスティック２４６９の前端部を同時に保持することが可能である。同様に、第２チャック２４６４は、スティックテーブル２４６２上の複数のスティック２４６９のうちの最下位以外のスティック２４６９の後端部を同時に保持することが可能である。 The frame main body 2461 has a hollow box shape with an open top. The stick table 2462 is disposed inside the upper portion of the frame main body 2461. A plurality of sticks 2469 can be stacked on the stick table 2462. The first chuck 2463 can simultaneously hold the front end portion of the stick 2469 other than the lowest one of the plurality of sticks 2469 on the stick table 2462. Similarly, the second chuck 2464 can simultaneously hold the rear end portion of the stick 2469 other than the lowest one of the plurality of sticks 2469 on the stick table 2462.
　部品押し出し機構部２４６５は、スティックテーブル２４６２上の複数のスティック２４６９のうち、最下位のスティック２４６９からその前方に部品Ｅを押し出す。ガイドフレーム２４６６は、フレーム本体２４６１の前部に固定され、このガイドフレーム２４６６に一対のガイドレール２４６７が支持されている。そして、一対のガイドレール２４６７の間に搬送ベルト２４６８が設けられている。部品押し出し機構部２４６５により前方に押し出された部品Ｅは、一対のガイドレール２４６７に沿って、搬送ベルト２４６８によって搬送される。これにより、スティック２４６９に収納された部品Ｅが、部品供給位置に供給される。 The component pushing mechanism unit 2465 pushes the component E forward from the lowest stick 2469 among the plurality of sticks 2469 on the stick table 2462. The guide frame 2466 is fixed to the front portion of the frame main body 2461, and a pair of guide rails 2467 are supported on the guide frame 2466. A conveyance belt 2468 is provided between the pair of guide rails 2467. The component E pushed forward by the component push-out mechanism 2465 is conveyed along the pair of guide rails 2467 by the conveyance belt 2468. As a result, the component E stored in the stick 2469 is supplied to the component supply position.
　部品供給動作に伴い最下位のスティック２４６９が部品切れとなると、第１及び第２チャック２４６３，２４６４が最下位以外のスティック２４６９を保持する。この状態でスティックテーブル２４６２がスティック２４６９の支持を解除する支持解除位置に変位することによって、最下位のスティック２４６９のみを自重でフレーム本体２４６１の内底部に落下させるようになっている。なお、部品切れのスティック２４６９の廃棄後は、スティックテーブル２４６２がスティック２４６９の支持位置に復帰し、第１及び第２チャック２４６３，２４６４が開放されることにより、スティックテーブル２４６２上に残りのスティック２４６９が載置され、次の（最下位の）スティック２４６９から部品Ｅの供給が行われる。 When the lowermost stick 2469 is out of parts due to the component supply operation, the first and second chucks 2463 and 2464 hold the sticks 2469 other than the lowermost one. In this state, the stick table 2462 is displaced to the support release position for releasing the support of the stick 2469, so that only the lowest stick 2469 is dropped by its own weight onto the inner bottom portion of the frame body 2461. After discarding the stick 2469, the stick table 2462 is returned to the support position of the stick 2469, and the first and second chucks 2463 and 2464 are opened, whereby the remaining stick 2469 on the stick table 2462. And the part E is supplied from the next (lowest) stick 2469.
　部品搭載基板の生産中において、部品切れとなったスティック２４６９がフレーム本体２４６１の内底部に落下すると、作業者は、新たなスティックをスティックフィーダー２４６に対して補給することができる。なお、新たなスティックをスティックフィーダー２４６に対して補給する際には、作業者は、新たなスティックに設けられた部品種特定用バーコードをバーコードリーダ８で読み取る読取操作を行う。 During the production of the component mounting board, when the stick 2469 that has run out of components falls to the inner bottom portion of the frame main body 2461, the operator can supply a new stick to the stick feeder 246. When a new stick is replenished to the stick feeder 246, the operator performs a reading operation of reading the part type specifying barcode provided on the new stick with the barcode reader 8.
　スティックフィーダー２４６に対する新たなスティックの部品補給作業の計画に関する管理は、作業計画管理装置３によって行われる。 Management related to the plan of a new stick replenishment work for the stick feeder 246 is performed by the work plan management device 3.
　＜部品実装機の制御系について＞
　部品実装機２の制御系について、図７のブロック図を参照して説明する。部品実装機２は、実装制御装置２０を備えている。実装制御装置２０は、部品実装機２の部品搭載動作を統括的に制御するとともに、ＡＦ２４１、トレイフィーダー２４５、及びスティックフィーダー２４６を含む部品供給装置の動作を制御する装置である。実装制御装置２０は、例えば制御プログラムを記憶するＲＯＭ（Ｒｅａｄ　Ｏｎｌｙ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ）や一時的にデータを記憶するフラッシュメモリ等の記憶装置が内蔵されたマイクロコンピュータからなり、前記制御プログラムが読み出されることにより、部品実装機１の部品搭載動作及び部品供給装置の動作を制御する。実装制御装置２０は、バス２０Ａを介して接続された、通信部２０１、記憶部２０２、表示部２０３、外部入出力部２０４、部品搭載動作処理部２０５、及び部品供給動作処理部２０６を含む。 <About the control system of the component mounter>
The control system of the component mounting machine 2 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. The component mounter 2 includes a mounting control device 20. The mounting control device 20 is a device that comprehensively controls the component mounting operation of the component mounting machine 2 and controls the operation of the component supply device including the AF 241, the tray feeder 245, and the stick feeder 246. The mounting control device 20 is composed of a microcomputer in which a storage device such as a ROM (Read Only Memory) for storing a control program and a flash memory for temporarily storing data is built, for example, and by reading the control program, The component mounting operation of the component mounter 1 and the operation of the component supply device are controlled. The mounting control device 20 includes a communication unit 201, a storage unit 202, a display unit 203, an external input / output unit 204, a component mounting operation processing unit 205, and a component supply operation processing unit 206, which are connected via a bus 20A.
　通信部２０１は、部品供給装置及び作業計画管理装置３とデータ通信するためのインターフェースである。部品実装機２の各部品供給部２４に配置される部品供給装置は全て、通信部２０１に接続されている。外部入出力部２０４は、バーコードリーダ８とデータ通信するためのインターフェースである。 The communication unit 201 is an interface for data communication with the component supply device and the work plan management device 3. All the component supply devices arranged in each component supply unit 24 of the component mounter 2 are connected to the communication unit 201. The external input / output unit 204 is an interface for data communication with the barcode reader 8.
　記憶部２０２は、図８に示す取付情報ＪＨ１を記憶する。取付情報ＪＨ１は、部品実装機２の各部品供給部２４に配置される部品供給装置における部品に関する情報である。取付情報ＪＨ１は、実装機種情報Ｊ１１と、セット位置情報Ｊ１２と、装置種情報Ｊ１３と、部品種情報Ｊ１４と、部品残数情報Ｊ１５と、部品残数警告値情報Ｊ１６と、部品残数停止値情報Ｊ１７とを関連付けた情報である。実装機種情報Ｊ１１は、部品実装機２を特定するための情報である。セット位置情報Ｊ１２は、部品供給装置の部品供給部２４内での位置を表す情報である。部品供給装置がＡＦ２４１である場合、セット位置情報Ｊ１２は、フィーダー取付部２４１７Ａにおけるスロット２４１７Ｂの位置で特定される情報である。各スロット２４１７Ｂには、互いに異なるスロット番号が割り当てられており、このスロット番号によって各スロット２４１７Ｂの位置、すなわちセット位置が特定されるようになっている。装置種情報Ｊ１３は、部品供給装置の種類（部品供給方式の種類）を表す情報である。 The storage unit 202 stores the attachment information JH1 shown in FIG. The attachment information JH1 is information regarding components in the component supply device arranged in each component supply unit 24 of the component mounter 2. Mounting information JH1 includes mounting model information J11, set position information J12, device type information J13, component type information J14, remaining component number information J15, remaining component number warning value information J16, and remaining component number stop value. Information associated with information J17. The mounted model information J11 is information for specifying the component mounter 2. The set position information J12 is information representing a position in the component supply unit 24 of the component supply apparatus. When the component supply device is AF241, the set position information J12 is information specified by the position of the slot 2417B in the feeder mounting portion 2417A. Different slot numbers are assigned to the slots 2417B, and the position of each slot 2417B, that is, the set position is specified by this slot number. The device type information J13 is information representing the type of component supply device (the type of component supply method).
　部品種情報Ｊ１４は、各部品供給装置により供給される部品の部品種を特定するための情報であり、部品を識別する識別情報や部品の名称を表す部品名情報などで示される。部品残数情報Ｊ１５は、各部品供給装置における部品の合計部品残数を表す情報である。部品残数警告値情報Ｊ１６は、各部品供給装置において、部品が部品切れとなる前の、前記部品残数情報Ｊ１５で表される合計部品残数が、警告を報知すべき所定値（部品残数警告値）である旨を表す情報である。部品残数停止値情報Ｊ１７は、特にスプライシングフィーダーに適用される情報であり、前記部品残数情報Ｊ１５で表される合計部品残数が、スプライシング作業用にテープの送出を停止すべき所定値（部品残数停止値）である旨を表す情報である。ＡＦ２４１、トレイフィーダー２４５、及びスティックフィーダー２４６には、スプライシングフィーダーのように「スプライシング作業用にテープの送出を停止すべき所定値」という概念は存在しない。このため、ＡＦ２４１、トレイフィーダー２４５、及びスティックフィーダー２４６における部品残数停止値情報Ｊ１７は、前記部品残数警告値情報Ｊ１６と同じとされている。 The component type information J14 is information for specifying the component type of the component supplied by each component supply device, and is indicated by identification information for identifying the component, component name information indicating the name of the component, and the like. The component remaining number information J15 is information representing the total component remaining number of components in each component supply apparatus. The remaining part number warning value information J16 is a predetermined value (part remaining part number) in which the total remaining part number represented by the remaining part number information J15 before the part runs out of parts in each part supply device. Number warning value). The component remaining number stop value information J17 is information that is particularly applied to the splicing feeder, and the total component remaining number represented by the component remaining number information J15 is a predetermined value (stopped for splicing work). (Part remaining number stop value). Unlike the splicing feeder, the AF 241, tray feeder 245, and stick feeder 246 do not have the concept of “predetermined value to stop feeding the tape for the splicing operation”. For this reason, the remaining component number stop value information J17 in the AF 241, the tray feeder 245, and the stick feeder 246 is the same as the remaining component number warning value information J16.
　表示部２０３は、通信部２０１によって受信される、後述の作業計画管理装置３から送信される情報などを表示する。部品搭載動作処理部２０５は、部品実装機２による部品搭載基板の生産において、ヘッドユニット２５などの動作を制御する。部品供給動作処理部２０６は、通信部２０１を介して各部品供給装置のフィーダー制御部２４０に制御信号を送信することにより、各部品供給装置の動作を統括的に制御する処理を行う。 The display unit 203 displays information transmitted from the work plan management apparatus 3 (described later) received by the communication unit 201. The component mounting operation processing unit 205 controls the operation of the head unit 25 and the like in the production of the component mounting board by the component mounting machine 2. The component supply operation processing unit 206 transmits a control signal to the feeder control unit 240 of each component supply device via the communication unit 201 to perform a process for comprehensively controlling the operation of each component supply device.
　なお、図２に示すように、部品実装機２には、作業者による段取り作業が行われる作業領域ＷＡが設定されている。本実施形態では、部品実装機２には、部品実装機２の－Ｙ側に配置された部品供給部２４が含まれる作業領域ＷＡと、部品実装機２の＋Ｙ側に配置された部品供給部２４が含まれる作業領域ＷＡとが設定されている。部品実装機２が複数連結されてなる部品実装ライン２Ｌにおいては、各部品実装機２の－Ｙ側に位置する作業領域ＷＡがＸ軸方向に並んで配置されるとともに、各部品実装機２の＋Ｙ側に位置する作業領域ＷＡがＸ軸方向に並んで配置される。以下では、部品実装ライン２Ｌにおける、各部品実装機２の－Ｙ側に位置する作業領域ＷＡの並びと、各部品実装機２の＋Ｙ側に位置する作業領域ＷＡの並びとを、それぞれ「レーン」と称する。 As shown in FIG. 2, the component mounter 2 is set with a work area WA in which a setup work by an operator is performed. In the present embodiment, the component mounter 2 includes a work area WA including a component supply unit 24 disposed on the −Y side of the component mounter 2, and a component supply unit disposed on the + Y side of the component mounter 2. A work area WA including 24 is set. In a component mounting line 2L in which a plurality of component mounters 2 are connected, work areas WA located on the −Y side of each component mounter 2 are arranged side by side in the X-axis direction. Work areas WA located on the + Y side are arranged side by side in the X-axis direction. Hereinafter, in the component mounting line 2L, the arrangement of the work areas WA located on the −Y side of each component mounter 2 and the arrangement of the work areas WA located on the + Y side of each component mounter 2 are respectively referred to as “lanes”. ".
　［作業計画管理装置の構成］
　作業計画管理装置３は、各部品実装機２に設定された作業領域ＷＡ内における、部品搭載基板の生産に応じて作業者が実施すべき段取り作業の計画を管理する装置である。段取り作業としては、部品供給部２４に配置された複数の部品供給装置の各々に対して新たな部品収納部材を補給する部品補給作業と、部品補給作業以外の複数の付随作業とが含まれる。部品補給作業としては、ＡＦ２４１に対する新たなリールの補給作業、トレイフィーダー２４５に対する新たなパレットの補給作業、並びにスティックフィーダー２４６に対する新たなスティックの補給作業、スプライシングフィーダーに対するスプライシング作業が含まれる。 [Configuration of work plan management device]
The work plan management device 3 is a device that manages a plan of a setup work to be performed by an operator in accordance with the production of a component mounting board in the work area WA set for each component mounter 2. The setup operation includes a component supply operation for supplying a new component storage member to each of the plurality of component supply devices arranged in the component supply unit 24 and a plurality of accompanying operations other than the component supply operation. The parts supply work includes a new reel supply work for the AF 241, a new pallet supply work for the tray feeder 245, a new stick supply work for the stick feeder 246, and a splicing work for the splicing feeder.
　付随作業としては、例えば、メガリール（結合リール）の作製作業、トレイのベーキング作業、半田ペーストの撹拌作業、吸着ノズルの洗浄作業、吸着ノズルの交換作業、バックアップピンの準備作業、廃材の回収作業などが挙げられる。メガリールの作製作業は、ＡＦ２４１に対して装着可能な、部品収納数の多い部品収納テープが巻回されたリールを作製する作業である。具体的には、部品収納テープが巻回された２本のリールを準備し、一方のリールの部品収納テープと他方のリールの部品収納テープとの先端同士を繋ぎ合わせ、一方のリールに他方のリールの部品収納テープを巻き取ることにより、１本のリール（メガリール）を作製する。トレイのベーキング作業は、トレイフィーダー２４５に対して装着可能なパレットに載置されるトレイをベーキングする作業である。加熱装置などを用いてトレイをベーキングすることによって、トレイに付着した水分等を除去する。半田ペーストの撹拌作業は、部品搭載前の基板Ｐに印刷される半田ペーストを準備する作業であり、撹拌機などを用いて半田ペーストを撹拌する作業である。吸着ノズルの洗浄作業は、ヘッドユニット２５に備えられる吸着ノズル２５１に関し、基板品種ごとに、部品の保持に適した吸着ノズル２５１を洗浄して準備しておく作業である。吸着ノズルの交換作業は、ヘッドユニット２５に備えられる吸着ノズル２５１を交換する作業である。バックアップピンの準備作業は、基板支持装置２８に備えられるバックアップピンに関し、基板品種ごとに、基板Ｐの支持に適したバックアップピンを準備しておく作業である。廃材の回収作業は、ヘッドユニット２５による部品取り出し後の廃材（例えば、部品取り出し後の廃テープ、空リール、空トレイ、空スティック等）を回収する作業である。 As the accompanying work, for example, production work of mega reel (combined reel), tray baking work, solder paste stirring work, suction nozzle cleaning work, suction nozzle replacement work, backup pin preparation work, waste material collection work, etc. Is mentioned. The manufacturing operation of the mega reel is an operation of manufacturing a reel on which a component storage tape having a large number of components that can be mounted on the AF 241 is wound. Specifically, two reels wound with a component storage tape are prepared, the tips of the component storage tape of one reel and the component storage tape of the other reel are joined, and one reel is connected to the other reel. One reel (mega reel) is produced by winding the reel component storage tape. The tray baking operation is an operation for baking a tray placed on a pallet that can be mounted on the tray feeder 245. By baking the tray using a heating device or the like, moisture or the like attached to the tray is removed. The solder paste agitating operation is an operation for preparing a solder paste to be printed on the substrate P before mounting the components, and is an operation for agitating the solder paste using an agitator or the like. The cleaning operation of the suction nozzle is an operation for cleaning and preparing the suction nozzle 251 suitable for holding components for each substrate type with respect to the suction nozzle 251 provided in the head unit 25. The suction nozzle replacement operation is an operation for replacing the suction nozzle 251 provided in the head unit 25. The backup pin preparation operation is an operation of preparing a backup pin suitable for supporting the substrate P for each substrate type with respect to the backup pin provided in the substrate support device 28. The waste material collecting operation is a work for collecting the waste material after the components are taken out by the head unit 25 (for example, the waste tape, the empty reel, the empty tray, the empty stick, etc. after the components are taken out).
　図９は、作業計画管理装置３の構成を示すブロック図である。作業計画管理装置３は、図１に示すように、各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０、生産計画管理装置４、基板情報管理装置５、無人搬送車６、及び作業者が携帯する携帯端末装置７とデータ通信可能に接続されている。また、作業計画管理装置３は、例えばマイクロコンピュータを含み、図９に示すように、通信部３１と、操作部３２と、表示部３３と、制御部３４とを備える。 FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the work plan management apparatus 3. As shown in FIG. 1, the work plan management device 3 includes a mounting control device 20, a production plan management device 4, a board information management device 5, an automatic guided vehicle 6, and a portable terminal carried by an operator. It is connected to the device 7 so that data communication is possible. The work plan management apparatus 3 includes, for example, a microcomputer, and includes a communication unit 31, an operation unit 32, a display unit 33, and a control unit 34 as shown in FIG.
　操作部３２は、タッチパネル、テンキー、スタートキー及び設定キー等を備え、作業計画管理装置３に対する作業者の操作や各種の設定を受付ける。表示部３３は、後述の制御部３４の作業管理部３４２により生成され、作業進捗判定部３４３により更新される作業リスト情報を表示する。通信部３１は、各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０、生産計画管理装置４、基板情報管理装置５、無人搬送車６、及び携帯端末装置７とのデータ通信を実現させるためのインターフェースである。通信部３１は、各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０、生産計画管理装置４、基板情報管理装置５、無人搬送車６、及び携帯端末装置７から送信される情報を取得し、その取得した情報を制御部３４に与える。また、通信部３１は、作業管理部３４２により生成され、作業進捗判定部３４３により更新される作業リスト情報が制御部３４から与えられ、その作業リスト情報を各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０、無人搬送車６、及び携帯端末装置７に送信（出力）する。 The operation unit 32 includes a touch panel, a numeric keypad, a start key, a setting key, and the like, and accepts operator operations and various settings for the work plan management device 3. The display unit 33 displays work list information that is generated by a work management unit 342 of the control unit 34 (described later) and updated by the work progress determination unit 343. The communication unit 31 is an interface for realizing data communication with the mounting control device 20, the production plan management device 4, the board information management device 5, the automatic guided vehicle 6, and the mobile terminal device 7 of each component mounting machine 2. . The communication unit 31 acquires information transmitted from the mounting control device 20, the production plan management device 4, the board information management device 5, the automatic guided vehicle 6, and the portable terminal device 7 of each component mounting machine 2. Information is given to the control unit 34. The communication unit 31 is provided with work list information generated by the work management unit 342 and updated by the work progress determination unit 343 from the control unit 34, and the work list information is provided to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2. Then, it is transmitted (output) to the automatic guided vehicle 6 and the portable terminal device 7.
　ここで、作業計画管理装置３とデータ通信可能に接続される生産計画管理装置４及び基板情報管理装置５について説明する。生産計画管理装置４は、各部品実装機２による部品搭載基板の生産計画を管理するための装置である。生産計画管理装置４は、例えばマイクロコンピュータからなる。生産計画管理装置４は、生産計画を立案する作業者の操作によって、部品搭載基板の生産計画に関する生産計画情報を作業計画管理装置３に送信する。図１０は、生産計画管理装置４から送信され、作業計画管理装置３に入力される生産計画情報ＪＨ２を説明するための図である。生産計画情報ＪＨ２は、生産順序情報Ｊ２１、基板品種情報Ｊ２２、生産数情報Ｊ２３、前記部品種情報Ｊ１４、及びサイクルタイム情報Ｊ２４が関連付けられた情報である。生産順序情報Ｊ２１は、部品搭載基板の生産順序を表す情報である。基板品種情報Ｊ２２は、部品搭載基板の生産に供される基板Ｐの品種を表す情報である。生産数情報Ｊ２３は、基板品種ごとの部品搭載基板の生産数を表す情報である。サイクルタイム情報Ｊ２４は、１枚の部品搭載基板の生産時における部品の搭載に要する時間（秒／枚）を表す情報である。 Here, the production plan management device 4 and the board information management device 5 connected to the work plan management device 3 so as to be able to perform data communication will be described. The production plan management device 4 is a device for managing the production plan of the component mounting board by each component mounting machine 2. The production plan management device 4 is composed of a microcomputer, for example. The production plan management device 4 transmits production plan information related to the production plan for the component mounting board to the work plan management device 3 by the operation of the operator who creates the production plan. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the production plan information JH2 transmitted from the production plan management device 4 and input to the work plan management device 3. The production plan information JH2 is information in which production order information J21, board type information J22, production quantity information J23, part type information J14, and cycle time information J24 are associated with each other. The production order information J21 is information representing the production order of the component mounting boards. The board type information J22 is information representing the type of board P used for production of the component mounting board. The production number information J23 is information representing the production number of component mounting boards for each board type. The cycle time information J24 is information representing the time (seconds / sheet) required to mount a component during production of one component mounting board.
　基板情報管理装置５は、各部品実装機２による部品搭載基板の生産時に参照される基板情報を管理するための装置である。基板情報管理装置５は、例えばマイクロコンピュータからなる。基板情報管理装置５は、作業者の操作によって、基板情報を作業計画管理装置３に送信する。図１１は、基板情報管理装置５から送信され、作業計画管理装置３に入力される基板情報ＪＨ３を説明するための図である。基板情報ＪＨ３は、前記基板品種情報Ｊ２２、前記セット位置情報Ｊ１２、前記部品種情報Ｊ１４、及び部品必要数情報Ｊ３１が関連付けられた情報である。部品必要数情報Ｊ３１は、１枚の部品搭載基板の生産に必要な部品の必要数（数／枚）に関する情報である。基板情報ＪＨ３は、基板品種情報Ｊ２２にて表される基板Ｐの品種が切り換えられる毎に、書き換えられる。 The board information management device 5 is a device for managing board information that is referenced when each component mounting machine 2 produces a component mounting board. The board information management device 5 is composed of, for example, a microcomputer. The board information management apparatus 5 transmits the board information to the work plan management apparatus 3 by the operator's operation. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the board information JH3 transmitted from the board information management apparatus 5 and input to the work plan management apparatus 3. The board information JH3 is information in which the board type information J22, the set position information J12, the component type information J14, and the necessary component number information J31 are associated with each other. The required component number information J31 is information relating to the required number (number / piece) of components required for the production of one component mounting board. The board information JH3 is rewritten every time the type of the board P represented by the board type information J22 is switched.
　基板情報ＪＨ３は、作業計画管理装置３を介して各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０に送信され、各部品実装機２による部品搭載基板の生産時に参照される。具体的には、実装制御装置２０の部品搭載動作処理部２０５は、部品実装機２による部品搭載基板の生産において、基板情報ＪＨ３に基づきヘッドユニット２５などの動作を制御する。基板情報ＪＨ３において、基板品種情報Ｊ２２にて表される基板品種の生産時に、セット位置情報Ｊ１２にて表されるセット位置に配置された部品供給装置によって部品が供給されると、ヘッドユニット２５は、部品種情報Ｊ１４にて表される部品を部品供給装置から取り出すように制御される。 The board information JH3 is transmitted to the mounting control apparatus 20 of each component mounter 2 via the work plan management apparatus 3, and is referred to when the component mounters 2 produce the component mounted boards. Specifically, the component mounting operation processing unit 205 of the mounting control device 20 controls the operation of the head unit 25 and the like based on the substrate information JH3 in the production of the component mounting board by the component mounting machine 2. In the board information JH3, when the parts are supplied by the parts supply device arranged at the set position represented by the set position information J12 during the production of the board kind represented by the board type information J22, the head unit 25 is The component represented by the component type information J14 is controlled to be taken out from the component supply device.
　作業計画管理装置３の制御部３４は、ＣＰＵ（Ｃｅｎｔｒａｌ　Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ　Ｕｎｉｔ）、制御プログラムを記憶するＲＯＭ（Ｒｅａｄ　Ｏｎｌｙ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ）、ＣＰＵの作業領域として使用されるＲＡＭ（Ｒａｎｄｏｍ　Ａｃｃｅｓｓ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ）等から構成されている。制御部３４は、ＣＰＵがＲＯＭに記憶された制御プログラムを実行することにより通信部３１、操作部３２及び表示部３３を制御するとともに、段取り作業の計画の管理に関する各種情報を生成する。制御部３４は、図９に示すように、部品供給監視部３４１と、作業管理部３４２と、作業進捗判定部３４３と、記憶部３４４とを含む。 The control unit 34 of the work plan management apparatus 3 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory) for storing a control program, a RAM (Random Access Memory) used as a work area of the CPU, and the like. . The control unit 34 controls the communication unit 31, the operation unit 32, and the display unit 33 by the CPU executing a control program stored in the ROM, and generates various types of information related to the management of the setup work plan. As illustrated in FIG. 9, the control unit 34 includes a component supply monitoring unit 341, a work management unit 342, a work progress determination unit 343, and a storage unit 344.
　図９に加えて図１２を参照して、制御部３４における部品供給監視部３４１、作業管理部３４２、作業進捗判定部３４３、及び記憶部３４４を説明する。図１２は、作業計画管理装置３の制御動作を説明するための図である。図１２は、第１生産期間ＴＷ０１において第１の基板品種の部品搭載基板が生産され、その後、基板品種が切換えられて、第２生産期間ＴＷ０２において第２の基板品種の部品搭載基板が生産される例を示している。また、図１２では、第１生産期間ＴＷ０１において、部品実装ライン２Ｌの各部品実装機２に備えられる複数の部品供給装置のうち、３台のＡＦ２４１Ａ、２４１Ｂ、２４１Ｃ、２台のトレイフィーダー２４５Ａ、２４５Ｂ、及び１台のスティックフィーダー２４６Ａから部品を供給し、部品搭載基板を生産する例が示されている。 Referring to FIG. 12 in addition to FIG. 9, the component supply monitoring unit 341, the work management unit 342, the work progress determination unit 343, and the storage unit 344 in the control unit 34 will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the control operation of the work plan management apparatus 3. In FIG. 12, a component mounting board of the first board type is produced in the first production period TW01, and then the board type is switched, and a component mounting board of the second board type is produced in the second production period TW02. An example is shown. In FIG. 12, in the first production period TW01, among the plurality of component supply devices provided in each component mounter 2 of the component mounting line 2L, three AFs 241A, 241B, 241C, two tray feeders 245A, An example is shown in which components are supplied from 245B and one stick feeder 246A to produce a component mounting board.
　なお、以下では、部品搭載基板の生産に応じて作業者が実施すべき段取り作業のうち、部品補給作業に注目し、前記付随作業については説明を省略する。部品補給作業としては、ＡＦ２４１Ａ、２４１Ｂ、２４１Ｃの各々に対して新たなリールを補給する部品補給作業、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａ、２４５Ｂの各々に対して新たなパレットを補給する部品補給作業、並びにスティックフィーダー２４６Ａに対して新たなスティックを補給する部品補給作業が含まれる。ＡＦ２４１Ａ、２４１Ｂ、２４１Ｃ、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａ、２４５Ｂ、及びスティックフィーダー２４６Ａを総称するときには、「部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６」と称し、リール、パレット及びスティックを総称するときには、「部品収納部材」と称する。 In the following, attention is paid to the component replenishment work among the setup work to be performed by the worker according to the production of the component mounting board, and description of the accompanying work is omitted. The parts supply work includes parts supply work for supplying new reels to AFs 241A, 241B, and 241C, parts supply work for supplying new pallets to tray feeders 245A and 245B, and stick feeder 246A. This includes parts replenishment work for replenishing a new stick. The AF 241A, 241B, 241C, the tray feeders 245A, 245B, and the stick feeder 246A are collectively referred to as “ component feeders 241, 245, 246”. Called.
　＜部品供給監視部について＞
　まず、部品供給監視部３４１は、ＡＦ２４１Ａ、２４１Ｂ、２４１Ｃ、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａ、２４５Ｂ、及びスティックフィーダー２４６Ａの各々に対する部品補給作業の計画の、管理の開始時刻を表す管理開始時刻ＴＳを取得する。部品供給監視部３４１は、第１生産期間ＴＷ０１での部品搭載基板の生産を開始する時刻を管理開始時刻ＴＳとして取得してもよいし、管理開始を指令する指令情報が操作部３２を介して入力された場合に、その指令情報が入力された時刻を管理開始時刻ＴＳとして取得してもよい。 <About the component supply monitoring unit>
First, the component supply monitoring unit 341 obtains a management start time TS that represents the management start time of the component supply work plan for each of the AFs 241A, 241B, 241C, the tray feeders 245A, 245B, and the stick feeder 246A. The component supply monitoring unit 341 may acquire the time at which the production of the component mounting board in the first production period TW01 is started as the management start time TS, or the command information for instructing the management start is obtained via the operation unit 32. When input, the time when the command information is input may be acquired as the management start time TS.
　部品供給監視部３４１は、管理開始時刻ＴＳを取得すると、当該管理開始時刻ＴＳから部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６の各々における部品の供給状況を監視する。部品供給監視部３４１は、部品補給作業が可能な時間帯を表す補給可能時間帯を、部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６ごとに特定する。図１２に示す例では、ＡＦ２４１Ａに対しては補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡが特定され、ＡＦ２４１Ｂに対しては補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＢが特定され、ＡＦ２４１Ｃに対しては補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＣが特定されている。また、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａに対しては補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＤが特定され、トレイフィーダー２４５Ｂに対しては補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＥが特定されている。更に、スティックフィーダー２４６Ａに対しては補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＦが特定されている。 The component supply monitoring unit 341, when acquiring the management start time TS, monitors the supply status of the components in each of the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246 from the management start time TS. The component supply monitoring unit 341 specifies a replenishable time zone that represents a time zone during which component replenishment work is possible for each of the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the replenishable time zone TWSA is specified for AF241A, the replenishable time zone TWSB is specified for AF241B, and the replenishable time zone TWSC is specified for AF241C. . Further, a replenishable time zone TWSD is specified for the tray feeder 245A, and a replenishable time zone TWSE is specified for the tray feeder 245B. Furthermore, a replenishable time zone TWSF is specified for the stick feeder 246A.
　補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦの各々における最も早い時刻（以下、「最早時刻」という）は、部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６に装着された複数の部品収納部材のうちの、部品供給が先行して行われる先行の部品収納部材が部品切れとなる時刻である。先行の部品収納部材が部品切れとなると、新たな部品収納部材の補給が可能となる。また、補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦの各々における最も遅い時刻（以下、「最遅時刻」という）は、部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６に装着された複数の部品収納部材の合計部品残数が所定の部品残数警告値に達する時刻である。 The earliest time in each of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF (hereinafter referred to as “earliest time”) is preceded by component supply among a plurality of component storage members mounted on the component supply devices 241, 245 and 246. This is the time when the preceding component storage member to be performed becomes a component exhaustion. When the preceding component storage member runs out of parts, a new component storage member can be supplied. Further, the latest time (hereinafter referred to as “latest time”) in each of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF is the total number of remaining parts of the plurality of parts storage members mounted on the parts supply devices 241, 245 and 246 This is the time when the predetermined remaining component warning value is reached.
　部品供給監視部３４１は、通信部３１から制御部３４に与えられた情報であって、各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０からの取付情報ＪＨ１、生産計画管理装置４からの生産計画情報ＪＨ２、及び基板情報管理装置５からの基板情報ＪＨ３に基づいて、部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６ごとに補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦを特定する。 The component supply monitoring unit 341 is information given from the communication unit 31 to the control unit 34, and includes mounting information JH 1 from the mounting control device 20 of each component mounting machine 2 and production plan information JH 2 from the production plan management device 4. Based on the board information JH3 from the board information management apparatus 5, the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF are specified for each of the component supply apparatuses 241, 245, and 246.
　具体的には、部品供給監視部３４１は、まず、取付情報ＪＨ１の部品残数情報Ｊ１５にて表される合計部品残数から、後続の部品収納部材における部品残数を減算し、先行の部品収納部材における部品残数を求める。更に、部品供給監視部３４１は、基板情報ＪＨ３の部品必要数情報Ｊ３１にて表される、１枚の部品搭載基板の生産に必要な部品種情報Ｊ１４で特定される部品ごとの必要数を、生産計画情報ＪＨ２のサイクルタイム情報Ｊ２４にて表される、基板品種情報Ｊ２２で特定される基板ごとの、１枚の部品搭載基板の生産時における部品の部品搭載時間で除算し、１秒当たりの使用部品数を求める。そして、部品供給監視部３４１は、先行の部品収納部材における前記部品残数を、１秒当たりの前記使用部品数で除算することにより、補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦの各々における最早時刻を求める。一方、部品供給監視部３４１は、部品残数情報Ｊ１５にて表される合計部品残数から、部品残数警告値情報Ｊ１６にて表される部品残数警告値を減算した部品数を、１秒当たりの前記使用部品数で除算することにより、補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦの各々における最遅時刻を求める。 Specifically, the component supply monitoring unit 341 first subtracts the component remaining number in the subsequent component storage member from the total component remaining number represented by the component remaining number information J15 of the attachment information JH1 to obtain the preceding component. The number of remaining parts in the storage member is obtained. Further, the component supply monitoring unit 341 calculates the necessary number for each component specified by the component type information J14 necessary for the production of one component mounting board represented by the component necessary number information J31 of the board information JH3. Divided by the component mounting time of the component at the time of production of one component mounting board for each board specified by the board type information J22 represented by the cycle time information J24 of the production plan information JH2 Find the number of parts used. Then, the component supply monitoring unit 341 calculates the earliest time in each of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF by dividing the number of remaining components in the preceding component storage member by the number of used components per second. On the other hand, the component supply monitoring unit 341 obtains the number of components obtained by subtracting the component remaining number warning value represented by the component remaining number warning value information J16 from the total component remaining number represented by the component remaining number information J15. By dividing by the number of used parts per second, the latest time in each of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF is obtained.
　ところで、部品残数情報Ｊ１５にて表される合計部品残数は、ヘッドユニット２５にて部品が取り出されるごとに減算される。詳細については後述するが、先行の部品収納部材が部品切れとなり、部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６に対して新たな部品収納部材が補給されたときには、その新たな部品収納部材に収納される部品の数（初期設定数）を、ヘッドユニット２５にて部品が取り出されるごとに変化する合計部品残数に加算することにより、合計部品残数が更新される。新たな部品収納部材に収納される部品の数（初期設定数）は、制御部３４のＲＯＭ等に、部品種情報Ｊ１４で特定される部品ごとに記憶されている。なお、使用途中の部品収納部材が新たな部品収納部材として補給された場合には、その部品収納部材に収納されている実際の部品数にて、制御部３４のＲＯＭ等に記憶されている前記初期設定数が書き換えられる。 Incidentally, the total number of remaining parts represented by the remaining part number information J15 is subtracted every time a part is taken out by the head unit 25. Although details will be described later, when the previous component storage member is out of components and a new component storage member is supplied to the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246, the component stored in the new component storage member Is added to the total remaining number of parts that changes each time a part is taken out by the head unit 25, so that the total remaining part number is updated. The number of parts stored in the new part storage member (initial setting number) is stored in the ROM or the like of the control unit 34 for each part specified by the part type information J14. When the component storage member in use is replenished as a new component storage member, the actual number of components stored in the component storage member is stored in the ROM or the like of the control unit 34. The default number is rewritten.
　部品供給監視部３４１は、部品残数情報Ｊ１５が更新されることに応じて、所定の周期（例えば３０秒周期）で補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦの特定結果を更新する。また、部品供給監視部３４１は、第１の基板品種の第１生産期間ＴＷ０１における補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦを特定するように構成されていてもよいし、第１の基板品種に加えて第２の基板品種以降の生産期間をも考慮して補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦを特定するように構成されていてもよい。 The component supply monitoring unit 341 updates the specific result of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF at a predetermined cycle (for example, 30-second cycle) in response to the update of the remaining component number information J15. In addition, the component supply monitoring unit 341 may be configured to specify the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF in the first production period TW01 of the first board type, or in addition to the first board type. The replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF may be specified in consideration of the production period after the second board type.
　＜作業管理部について＞
　次に、作業管理部３４２は、部品供給監視部３４１により特定された補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦに基づいて、ＡＦ２４１Ａ、２４１Ｂ、２４１Ｃ、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａ、２４５Ｂ、及びスティックフィーダー２４６Ａの各々に対する部品補給作業の計画を管理する。作業管理部３４２は、図９に示すように、作業対象特定部３４２１と作業タイミング特定部３４２２とを含む。 <About work management department>
Next, the work management unit 342 supplies components to each of the AFs 241A, 241B, 241C, the tray feeders 245A, 245B, and the stick feeder 246A based on the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF specified by the component supply monitoring unit 341. Manage work plans. As illustrated in FIG. 9, the work management unit 342 includes a work target specifying unit 3421 and a work timing specifying unit 3422.
　作業対象特定部３４２１は、部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６において、部品補給作業の対象となる部品補給対象装置を特定する。具体的には、作業対象特定部３４２１は、まず、補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦの各々で重複する重複補給時間帯を認識する。図１２に示す例では、作業対象特定部３４２１は、時系列の早い方から順に、第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１、第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２、及び第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３の、複数の重複補給時間帯を認識している。第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１は、ＡＦ２４１Ａの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡと、ＡＦ２４１Ｂの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＢとで重複する時間帯である。第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１の最も早い時刻（最早時刻）は、ＡＦ２４１Ｂの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＢにおける最早時刻Ｔ１に一致し、第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１の最も遅い時刻（最遅時刻）は、ＡＦ２４１Ａの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡにおける最遅時刻Ｔ２に一致している。 The work target specifying unit 3421 specifies a component supply target device to be a component supply work target in the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246. Specifically, the work target specifying unit 3421 first recognizes overlapping replenishment time zones that overlap in each of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF. In the example illustrated in FIG. 12, the work target specifying unit 3421 includes a plurality of first overlapping supply time zone TWD1, second overlapping supply time zone TWD2, and third overlapping supply time zone TWD3 in order from the earliest in time series. Recognizing overlapping supply hours. The first overlapping replenishment time zone TWD1 is a time zone that overlaps the replenishable time zone TWSA of AF241A and the replenishable time zone TWSB of AF241B. The earliest time (earliest time) of the first overlapping supply time zone TWD1 coincides with the earliest time T1 in the AF241B replenishable time zone TWSB, and the latest time (latest time) of the first overlapping supply time zone TWD1 is This corresponds to the latest time T2 in the replenishable time zone TWSA of AF241A.
　第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２は、ＡＦ２４１Ｃの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＣと、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＤとで重複する時間帯である。第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２の最も早い時刻（最早時刻）は、ＡＦ２４１Ｃの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＣにおける最早時刻Ｔ３に一致し、第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２の最も遅い時刻（最遅時刻）は、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＤにおける最遅時刻Ｔ４に一致している。第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３は、トレイフィーダー２４５Ｂの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＥと、スティックフィーダー２４６Ａの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＦとで重複する時間帯である。第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３の最も早い時刻（最早時刻）は、スティックフィーダー２４６Ａの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＦにおける最早時刻Ｔ５に一致し、第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３の最も遅い時刻（最遅時刻）は、トレイフィーダー２４５Ｂの補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＥにおける最遅時刻Ｔ６に一致している。 The second overlapping replenishment time zone TWD2 is a time zone that overlaps the replenishable time zone TWSC of AF241C and the replenishable time zone TWSD of the tray feeder 245A. The earliest time (earliest time) of the second overlapping supply time zone TWD2 coincides with the earliest time T3 in the AF241C replenishable time zone TWSC, and the latest time (latest time) of the second overlapping supply time zone TWD2 is This corresponds to the latest time T4 in the replenishable time zone TWSD of the tray feeder 245A. The third overlapping replenishment time zone TWD3 is a time zone that overlaps the replenishable time zone TWSE of the tray feeder 245B and the replenishable time zone TWSF of the stick feeder 246A. The earliest time (earliest time) of the third overlapping replenishment time zone TWD3 coincides with the earliest time T5 in the replenishable time zone TWSF of the stick feeder 246A, and the latest time (latest time) of the third overlapping replenishment time zone TWD3. Corresponds to the latest time T6 in the replenishable time zone TWSE of the tray feeder 245B.
　そして、作業対象特定部３４２１は、各重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１、ＴＷＤ２、ＴＷＤ３内で部品補給作業が可能な全ての部品供給装置を、部品補給対象装置として特定する。作業対象特定部３４２１は、第１～第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１、ＴＷＤ２、ＴＷＤ３ごとに、部品補給対象装置を特定する。図１２に示す例では、作業対象特定部３４２１は、第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１内で部品補給作業が可能な部品補給対象装置として、ＡＦ２４１Ａ、２４１Ｂを特定する。また、作業対象特定部３４２１は、第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２内で部品補給作業が可能な部品補給対象装置として、ＡＦ２４１Ｃ、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａを特定する。また、作業対象特定部３４２１は、第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３内で部品補給作業が可能な部品補給対象装置として、トレイフィーダー２４５Ｂ、スティックフィーダー２４６Ａを特定する。 Then, the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies all the component supply devices that can perform the component supply work in the overlapping supply time zones TWD1, TWD2, and TWD3 as the component supply target devices. The work target specifying unit 3421 specifies a component supply target device for each of the first to third overlapping supply time zones TWD1, TWD2, and TWD3. In the example illustrated in FIG. 12, the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies AFs 241A and 241B as component supply target devices that can perform a component supply operation within the first overlapping supply time period TWD1. In addition, the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies the AF 241C and the tray feeder 245A as component supply target devices that can perform the component supply work within the second overlapping supply time period TWD2. In addition, the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies the tray feeder 245B and the stick feeder 246A as component supply target devices that can perform the component supply work in the third overlapping supply time period TWD3.
　このように、作業対象特定部３４２１は、各重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１、ＴＷＤ２、ＴＷＤ３内で部品補給作業が可能な全ての部品供給装置を、部品補給対象装置として特定する。これにより、各重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１、ＴＷＤ２、ＴＷＤ３内で部品収納部材を補給可能な部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６に対しては、作業者による部品補給作業をまとめて行う、「まとめ補給」が可能となる。このため、部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６が付設された各部品実装機２のもとに作業者が行く頻度を低減することができ、作業者による部品補給作業の負荷を軽減することができる。 As described above, the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies all the component supply devices that can perform the component supply work in the overlapping supply time zones TWD1, TWD2, and TWD3 as the component supply target devices. As a result, the parts supply devices 241, 245, and 246 that can supply the component storage members within the overlapping supply time zones TWD 1, TWD 2, and TWD 3 are collectively supplied by the operator. Is possible. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the worker goes under each of the component mounting machines 2 provided with the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246, and to reduce the load of component replenishment work by the worker. .
　更に、作業対象特定部３４２１は、部品実装ライン２Ｌの各部品実装機２に設定された作業領域ＷＡのうち、作業者による段取り作業（部品補給作業）の作業対象となる作業対象領域を特定する。作業対象特定部３４２１は、前記部品補給対象装置が配置される作業領域ＷＡを、前記作業対象領域として特定する。より詳しく説明すると、作業対象特定部３４２１は、取付情報ＪＨ１に基づいて、部品補給対象装置を表す装置種情報Ｊ１３と関連付けられたセット位置情報Ｊ１２を認識し、当該セット位置情報Ｊ１２にて表されるセット位置が含まれる作業領域ＷＡを、作業対象領域として特定する。 Further, the work target specifying unit 3421 specifies a work target area that is a work target of a setup work (part replenishment work) by the worker among the work areas WA set in each component mounting machine 2 of the component mounting line 2L. . The work target specifying unit 3421 specifies the work area WA in which the component supply target device is arranged as the work target area. More specifically, the work target specifying unit 3421 recognizes the set position information J12 associated with the device type information J13 representing the component supply target device based on the attachment information JH1, and is represented by the set position information J12. The work area WA including the set position is specified as the work target area.
　なお、上記のように、部品供給監視部３４１による補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦの特定結果が所定の周期で更新されると、作業対象特定部３４２１は、作業対象領域の特定結果を更新する。また、部品供給監視部３４１と同様に、作業対象特定部３４２１は、第１の基板品種の第１生産期間ＴＷ０１における作業対象領域を特定するように構成されていてもよいし、第１の基板品種に加えて第２の基板品種以降の生産期間をも考慮して作業対象領域を特定するように構成されていてもよい。 Note that, as described above, when the specification result of the replenishable time zones TWSA to TWSF by the component supply monitoring unit 341 is updated at a predetermined period, the work target specifying unit 3421 updates the specification result of the work target region. Similarly to the component supply monitoring unit 341, the work target specifying unit 3421 may be configured to specify a work target region in the first production period TW01 of the first board type, or the first board. The work target area may be specified in consideration of the production period after the second board type in addition to the type.
　次に、作業タイミング特定部３４２２は、作業対象特定部３４２１により特定された作業対象領域内のセット位置に配置された部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６に対して同一の、部品補給作業の補給作業タイミングを、第１～第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１、ＴＷＤ２、ＴＷＤ３ごとに特定する。図１２に示す例では、作業タイミング特定部３４２２は、ＡＦ２４１Ａ、２４１Ｂに対して同一の、第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１内での部品補給作業のタイミングとして、第１補給作業タイミングＴＨ１を特定する。また、作業タイミング特定部３４２２は、ＡＦ２４１Ｃ、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａに対して同一の、第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２内での部品補給作業のタイミングとして、第２補給作業タイミングＴＨ２を特定する。また、作業タイミング特定部３４２２は、トレイフィーダー２４５Ｂ、スティックフィーダー２４６Ａに対して同一の、第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３内での部品補給作業のタイミングとして、第３補給作業タイミングＴＨ３を特定する。 Next, the work timing specifying unit 3422 supplies the same component replenishment work to the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246 arranged at the set position in the work target area specified by the work target specifying unit 3421. The timing is specified for each of the first to third overlapping supply time zones TWD1, TWD2, and TWD3. In the example illustrated in FIG. 12, the work timing specifying unit 3422 specifies the first supply work timing TH1 as the parts supply work timing within the first overlapping supply time period TWD1 that is the same for the AFs 241A and 241B. Further, the work timing specifying unit 3422 specifies the second supply work timing TH2 as the timing of parts supply work within the same second overlap supply time zone TWD2 with respect to the AF 241C and the tray feeder 245A. Further, the work timing specifying unit 3422 specifies the third replenishment work timing TH3 as the timing of parts replenishment work within the third overlapping replenishment time zone TWD3 for the tray feeder 245B and the stick feeder 246A.
　作業タイミング特定部３４２２は、第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１内での第１補給作業タイミングＴＨ１として、第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１の最早時刻Ｔ１を特定することが望ましい。第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１の最早時刻Ｔ１は、当該第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１内で最も早い時刻である。このような、第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１内で最も早い時刻となる最早時刻Ｔ１を、第１補給作業タイミングＴＨ１とすることによって、作業者は、時間的な余裕がある状態で、ＡＦ２４１Ａ、２４１Ｂに対する部品補給作業（段取り作業）を、まとめて行うことができる。 It is desirable that the work timing specifying unit 3422 specifies the earliest time T1 of the first overlapping supply time period TWD1 as the first supply operation timing TH1 within the first overlapping supply time period TWD1. The earliest time T1 of the first overlap supply time zone TWD1 is the earliest time in the first overlap supply time zone TWD1. By setting the earliest time T1, which is the earliest time in the first overlapped replenishment time zone TWD1, as the first replenishment operation timing TH1, the operator can perform AF 241A, 241B in a state where there is a time margin. The parts replenishment work (setup work) can be performed collectively.
　同様に、作業タイミング特定部３４２２は、第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２内での第２補給タイミングＴＨ２として第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２の最早時刻Ｔ３を特定し、第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３内での第３補給タイミングＴＨ３として第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３の最早時刻Ｔ５を特定することが望ましい。 Similarly, the work timing specifying unit 3422 specifies the earliest time T3 of the second overlap supply time zone TWD2 as the second supply timing TH2 within the second overlap supply time zone TWD2, and within the third overlap supply time zone TWD3. It is desirable to specify the earliest time T5 of the third overlapping supply time zone TWD3 as the third supply timing TH3.
　（作業管理部の変形例）
　また、作業対象特定部３４２１は、第１生産期間ＴＷ０１を、所定の特定時間を時間間隔とする複数の特定期間ＴＷ１１、ＴＷ１２、ＴＷ１３に区画するように構成されていてもよい。各特定期間ＴＷ１１、ＴＷ１２、ＴＷ１３の時間間隔を規定する前記特定時間は、操作部３２を介して作業者により入力され、例えば３０分間などの任意の時間に設定される。以下では、時系列の順序で早い方から順に、第１特定期間ＴＷ１１、第２特定期間ＴＷ１２、第３特定期間ＴＷ１３と称する。第１～第３特定期間ＴＷ１１、ＴＷ１２、ＴＷ１３の各々における時間間隔は、一定に設定される。 (Modification of work management unit)
Further, the work target specifying unit 3421 may be configured to partition the first production period TW01 into a plurality of specific periods TW11, TW12, and TW13 having a predetermined specific time as a time interval. The specific time that defines the time interval between the specific periods TW11, TW12, and TW13 is input by an operator via the operation unit 32, and is set to an arbitrary time such as 30 minutes. Hereinafter, the first specific period TW11, the second specific period TW12, and the third specific period TW13 are referred to in order from the earliest in chronological order. The time intervals in each of the first to third specific periods TW11, TW12, and TW13 are set to be constant.
　作業対象特定部３４２１は、部品供給装置２４１、２４５、２４６の各々に対応した補給可能時間帯ＴＷＳＡ～ＴＷＳＦで重複する第１～第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１～ＴＷＤ３を認識する。更に、作業対象特定部３４２１は、第１～第３特定期間ＴＷ１１、ＴＷ１２、ＴＷ１３の各々において、第１～第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１～ＴＷＤ３のいずれかの時間帯の最早時刻が含まれるか否かを判断する。図１２に示す例では、第１特定期間ＴＷ１１に第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１の最早時刻が含まれ、第２特定期間ＴＷ１２に第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２の最早時刻が含まれ、第３特定期間ＴＷ１３に第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３の最早時刻が含まれている。 The work target specifying unit 3421 recognizes the first to third overlapping supply time zones TWD1 to TWD3 that overlap in the possible supply time zones TWSA to TWSF corresponding to each of the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246. Further, the work target specifying unit 3421 includes the earliest time in any one of the first to third overlapping supply time zones TWD1 to TWD3 in each of the first to third specific periods TW11, TW12, and TW13. Judge whether or not. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the earliest time of the first overlapping supply time zone TWD1 is included in the first specific period TW11, and the earliest time of the second overlapping supply time period TWD2 is included in the second specific period TW12. The earliest time of the third overlapping supply time zone TWD3 is included in the period TW13.
　この場合、作業対象特定部３４２１は、第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１内において、当該第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１の最早時刻と、第１特定期間ＴＷ１１の最も遅い時刻（最遅時刻）との間の時間帯で部品補給作業が可能な部品補給対象装置として、ＡＦ２４１Ａ、２４１Ｂを特定する。また、作業対象特定部３４２１は、第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２内において、当該第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２の最早時刻と、第２特定期間ＴＷ１２の最も遅い時刻（最遅時刻）との間の時間帯で部品補給作業が可能な部品補給対象装置として、ＡＦ２４１Ｃ、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａを特定する。また、作業対象特定部３４２１は、第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３内において、当該第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３の最早時刻と、第３特定期間ＴＷ１３の最も遅い時刻（最遅時刻）との間の時間帯で部品補給作業が可能な部品補給対象装置として、トレイフィーダー２４５Ｂ、スティックフィーダー２４６Ａを特定する。 In this case, the work target specifying unit 3421 is between the earliest time of the first overlap supply time zone TWD1 and the latest time (latest time) of the first specification period TW11 in the first overlap supply time zone TWD1. The AFs 241A and 241B are specified as the component supply target devices that can perform the component supply operation in the time zone. In addition, the work target specifying unit 3421 is between the earliest time of the second overlap supply time zone TWD2 and the latest time (latest time) of the second specification period TW12 in the second overlap supply time zone TWD2. The AF 241C and the tray feeder 245A are specified as the component supply target devices that can perform the component supply operation in the time zone. In addition, the work target specifying unit 3421 is between the earliest time of the third overlap supply time zone TWD3 and the latest time (latest time) of the third specification period TW13 in the third overlap supply time zone TWD3. A tray feeder 245B and a stick feeder 246A are specified as parts supply target devices capable of supplying parts in a time zone.
　作業タイミング特定部３４２２は、第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１内において、当該第１重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ１の最早時刻と、第１特定期間ＴＷ１１の最遅時刻との間の時間帯内で、ＡＦ２４１Ａ、２４１Ｂに対して同一の第１補給作業タイミングＴＨ１を特定する。また、作業タイミング特定部３４２２は、第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２内において、当該第２重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ２の最早時刻と、第２特定期間ＴＷ１２の最遅時刻との間の時間帯内で、ＡＦ２４１Ｃ、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａに対して同一の第２補給作業タイミングＴＨ２を特定する。また、作業タイミング特定部３４２２は、第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３内において、当該第３重複補給時間帯ＴＷＤ３の最早時刻と、第３特定期間ＴＷ１３の最遅時刻との間の時間帯内で、トレイフィーダー２４５Ｂ、スティックフィーダー２４６Ａに対して同一の第３補給作業タイミングＴＨ３を特定する。 The work timing specifying unit 3422 includes, within the first overlapping supply time zone TWD1, within the time zone between the earliest time of the first overlapping supply time zone TWD1 and the latest time of the first specific time period TW11, AF241A, The same first supply work timing TH1 is specified for 241B. In addition, the work timing specifying unit 3422 is within the time zone between the earliest time of the second duplicate supply time zone TWD2 and the latest time of the second specific period TW12 in the second overlap supply time zone TWD2. The same second supply operation timing TH2 is specified for the AF 241C and the tray feeder 245A. In addition, the work timing specifying unit 3422 is within the time zone between the earliest time of the third overlapping supply time zone TWD3 and the latest time of the third specific period TW13 in the third overlapping supply time zone TWD3. The same third supply work timing TH3 is specified for the tray feeder 245B and the stick feeder 246A.
　（作業管理部により生成される作業リスト情報について）
　作業管理部３４２の作業対象特定部３４２１は、作業対象領域の特定結果を表す情報として、図１３に示す第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４を生成する。第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４は、作業対象領域を、当該作業対象領域内で実施される段取り作業（部品補給作業）と関連付けてリスト化した情報である。本実施形態では、第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４は、後述の作業進捗判定部３４３による段取り作業（部品補給作業）の進捗状況の判定結果を表す作業進捗状況情報が付加された情報である。更に、第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４においては、作業対象領域が、後述の無人搬送車６の移動経路の上流から下流に向かって順番に並べられてリスト化されている。 (About work list information generated by the work management unit)
The work target specifying unit 3421 of the work management unit 342 generates first work list information JH4 shown in FIG. 13 as information indicating the result of specifying the work target area. The first work list information JH4 is information obtained by listing the work target area in association with the setup work (part supply work) performed in the work target area. In the present embodiment, the first work list information JH4 is information to which work progress status information representing the determination result of the progress status of the setup work (part supply work) by the work progress judgment unit 343, which will be described later, is added. Further, in the first work list information JH4, work target areas are arranged and listed in order from the upstream to the downstream of the movement path of the automatic guided vehicle 6 described later.
　第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４は、図１３に示すように、移動経路番号情報Ｊ４１、作業対象領域番号情報Ｊ４２、部品実装ライン名情報Ｊ４３、レーン名情報Ｊ４４、前記実装機種情報Ｊ１１、前記セット位置情報Ｊ１２、前記装置種情報Ｊ１３、前記部品種情報Ｊ１４、前記部品残数情報Ｊ３１、補給可能時間情報Ｊ４５、警告時間情報Ｊ４６、停止時間情報Ｊ４７、生産可能時間情報Ｊ４８、作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９、作業標準時間情報Ｊ５０、及び滞在許容時間情報Ｊ５１が関連付けられた情報である。 As shown in FIG. 13, the first work list information JH4 includes movement path number information J41, work target area number information J42, component mounting line name information J43, lane name information J44, the mounting model information J11, and the set position information. J12, device type information J13, part type information J14, remaining parts number information J31, replenishable time information J45, warning time information J46, stop time information J47, production available time information J48, work progress status information J49, work Standard time information J50 and allowable stay time information J51 are associated with each other.
　第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４を構成する各情報について、図１３に加えて図１４を参照して説明する。図１４は、後述の無人搬送車６の移動制御部６３により実行される、第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に基づく誘導移動処理を説明するための図である。 Each information constituting the first work list information JH4 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 in addition to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the guided movement process based on the first work list information JH4, which is executed by the movement control unit 63 of the automatic guided vehicle 6 described later.
　なお、図１４では、部品実装ライン２Ｌの各部品実装機２が、後述の無人搬送車６の移動経路６Ｒの上流から下流に向かって順番に、第１部品実装機２Ａ、第２部品実装機２Ｂ、第３部品実装機２Ｃ、第４部品実装機２Ｄ、第５部品実装機２Ｅ、第６部品実装機２Ｆと示されている。また、第１部品実装機２Ａに設定された作業領域が第１作業領域ＷＡ１と示されており、同様に、第２部品実装機２Ｂの作業領域が第２作業領域ＷＡ２、第３部品実装機２Ｃの作業領域が第３作業領域ＷＡ３、第４部品実装機２Ｄの作業領域が第４作業領域ＷＡ４、第５部品実装機２Ｅの作業領域が第５作業領域ＷＡ５、第６部品実装機２Ｆの作業領域が第６作業領域ＷＡ６と示されている。 In FIG. 14, the component mounting machines 2 on the component mounting line 2 </ b> L are arranged in order from the upstream to the downstream of the movement path 6 </ b> R of the automatic guided vehicle 6, which will be described later. 2B, a third component mounter 2C, a fourth component mounter 2D, a fifth component mounter 2E, and a sixth component mounter 2F. Further, the work area set in the first component mounting machine 2A is shown as a first work area WA1, and similarly, the work area of the second component mounter 2B is the second work area WA2 and the third component mounter. The work area of 2C is the third work area WA3, the work area of the fourth component mounter 2D is the fourth work area WA4, the work area of the fifth component mounter 2E is the fifth work area WA5, and the sixth component mounter 2F. The work area is indicated as a sixth work area WA6.
　更に、図１４に示す例では、作業対象特定部３４２１は、第１～第６作業領域ＷＡ１～ＷＡ６のうち、第１作業領域ＷＡ１、第３作業領域ＷＡ３、第４作業領域ＷＡ４、及び第６作業領域ＷＡ６を、作業対象領域として特定している。第１作業領域ＷＡ１には、複数のＡＦ２４１とスプライシングフィーダーＳＰＦとが混在して配置され、これらのうちの２台のＡＦ２４１ＡとスプライシングフィーダーＳＰＦとが部品補給対象装置として特定され、これにより第１作業領域ＷＡ１が作業対象領域とされている。第３作業領域ＷＡ３には、複数のＡＦ２４１が配置され、これらのうちの５台のＡＦ２４１Ａが部品補給対象装置として特定され、これにより第３作業領域ＷＡ３が作業対象領域とされている。第４作業領域ＷＡ４には、複数のトレイフィーダー２４５が配置され、これらのうちの２台のトレイフィーダー２４５Ａが部品補給対象装置として特定され、これにより第４作業領域ＷＡ４が作業対象領域とされている。第６作業領域ＷＡ６には、複数のスティックフィーダー２４６が配置され、これらのうちの２台のスティックフィーダー２４６Ａが部品補給対象装置として特定され、これにより第６作業領域ＷＡ６が作業対象領域とされている。 Furthermore, in the example illustrated in FIG. 14, the work target specifying unit 3421 includes the first work area WA1, the third work area WA3, the fourth work area WA4, and the sixth work area WA1 to WA6 among the first to sixth work areas WA1 to WA6. The work area WA6 is specified as the work target area. A plurality of AFs 241 and splicing feeders SPF are mixedly arranged in the first work area WA1, and two of these AFs 241A and splicing feeders SPF are specified as parts replenishment target devices, thereby the first work The area WA1 is a work target area. A plurality of AFs 241 are arranged in the third work area WA3, and five AFs 241A among these AFs 241A are specified as the component supply target devices, and thereby the third work area WA3 is set as the work target area. A plurality of tray feeders 245 are arranged in the fourth work area WA4, and two of these tray feeders 245A are specified as the component supply target devices, and thereby the fourth work area WA4 is set as the work target area. Yes. A plurality of stick feeders 246 are arranged in the sixth work area WA6, and two of these stick feeders 246A are specified as the parts supply target devices, whereby the sixth work area WA6 is set as the work target area. Yes.
　移動経路番号情報Ｊ４１は、後述の無人搬送車６の移動経路６Ｒの位置を特定するための情報である。作業対象領域番号情報Ｊ４２は、作業対象特定部３４２１により特定された各作業対象領域（第１作業領域ＷＡ１、第３作業領域ＷＡ３、第４作業領域ＷＡ４、第６作業領域ＷＡ６）を識別するための情報である。部品実装ライン名情報Ｊ４３は、部品実装ライン２Ｌを特定するための情報である。レーン名情報Ｊ４４は、作業対象領域番号情報Ｊ４２にて表される作業対象領域が、各部品実装機２Ａ～２Ｆの－Ｙ側及び＋Ｙ側の何れに位置する作業領域の並び（レーン）に属するかを表す情報である。 The movement route number information J41 is information for specifying the position of the movement route 6R of the automatic guided vehicle 6 described later. The work target area number information J42 identifies each work target area (first work area WA1, third work area WA3, fourth work area WA4, sixth work area WA6) specified by the work target specifying unit 3421. Information. The component mounting line name information J43 is information for specifying the component mounting line 2L. In the lane name information J44, the work target area represented by the work target area number information J42 belongs to an arrangement (lane) of work areas located on either the −Y side or the + Y side of each of the component mounters 2A to 2F. It is the information showing.
　補給可能時間情報Ｊ４５は、作業対象領域番号情報Ｊ４２にて表される各作業対象領域において、セット位置情報Ｊ１２にて表されるセット位置に配置される部品補給対象装置に対し、部品補給作業が可能となるまでの時間を表す情報である。 The replenishable time information J45 indicates that the component replenishment work is performed on the component replenishment target device arranged at the set position represented by the set position information J12 in each work target region represented by the work target region number information J42. It is information representing the time until it becomes possible.
　警告時間情報Ｊ４６は、セット位置情報Ｊ１２にて表されるセット位置に配置される部品補給対象装置（ＡＦ２４１Ａ、トレイフィーダー（ＴＦ）２４５Ａ、スティックフィーダー（ＳＦ）２４６Ａ、スプライシングフィーダーＳＰＦ）において、部品残数情報Ｊ１５にて表される合計部品残数が部品残数警告値に達するまでの時間を表す情報である。停止時間情報Ｊ４７は、セット位置情報Ｊ１２にて表されるセット位置に配置される部品補給対象装置において、部品残数情報Ｊ１５にて表される合計部品残数が部品残数停止値に達するまでの時間を表す情報である。部品補給対象装置としてのＡＦ２４１Ａ、トレイフィーダー（ＴＦ）２４５Ａ、及びスティックフィーダー（ＳＦ）２４６Ａにおいて、例えば前記部品残数停止値がゼロ（０）に設定された場合、停止時間情報Ｊ４７は部品残数情報Ｊ１５にて表される合計部品残数がゼロ（０）に達するまでの時間を表す情報となる。部品補給対象装置としてのスプライシングフィーダーＳＰＦにおいて、例えば前記部品残数停止値がスプライシング作業用にテープの送出を停止すべき所定値に設定された場合、停止時間情報Ｊ４７は部品残数情報Ｊ１５にて表される合計部品残数が前記所定値に達するまでの時間を表す情報となる。生産可能時間情報Ｊ４８は、セット位置情報Ｊ１２にて表されるセット位置に配置される部品補給対象装置（ＡＦ２４１Ａ、トレイフィーダー（ＴＦ）２４５Ａ、スティックフィーダー（ＳＦ）２４６Ａ、スプライシングフィーダーＳＰＦ）において、部品搭載基板の生産に応じた部品供給の継続が可能な時間を表す情報である。 The warning time information J46 is stored in a component supply target device (AF241A, tray feeder (TF) 245A, stick feeder (SF) 246A, splicing feeder SPF) disposed at the set position represented by the set position information J12. This is information representing the time until the total number of remaining parts represented by the number information J15 reaches the remaining part number warning value. The stop time information J47 is obtained until the total remaining part number represented by the remaining part number information J15 reaches the remaining part number stop value in the parts supply target device arranged at the set position represented by the set position information J12. It is the information showing the time. In the AF 241A, the tray feeder (TF) 245A, and the stick feeder (SF) 246A as the parts supply target device, for example, when the part remaining number stop value is set to zero (0), the stop time information J47 is the number of remaining parts. This is information indicating the time until the total number of remaining parts represented by the information J15 reaches zero (0). In the splicing feeder SPF serving as the component supply target device, for example, when the component remaining number stop value is set to a predetermined value for stopping the tape delivery for the splicing work, the stop time information J47 is represented by the component remaining number information J15. This is information representing the time until the total number of remaining parts reaches the predetermined value. The production possible time information J48 is a component supply target device (AF241A, tray feeder (TF) 245A, stick feeder (SF) 246A, splicing feeder SPF) arranged at the set position represented by the set position information J12. This is information representing the time during which component supply can be continued according to the production of the mounted substrate.
　警告時間情報Ｊ４６、停止時間情報Ｊ４７及び生産可能時間情報Ｊ４８の各々は、部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業（段取り作業）の作業開始の制限時刻を規定する情報でもある。部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業（段取り作業）には、作業開始の制限時刻が設定されている。作業開始の制限時刻としては、部品残数情報Ｊ１５にて表される合計部品残数が部品残数警告値に達する時刻、部品残数情報Ｊ１５にて表される合計部品残数が部品残数停止値に達する時刻、並びに、部品補給対象装置による部品供給の継続が不能となる時刻、などが挙げられる。つまり、制限時刻に達するまでに部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業を開始しないと、部品補給対象装置による部品供給停止の可能性が高まり、部品搭載基板の生産に影響を及ぼす。 Each of the warning time information J46, the stop time information J47, and the production possible time information J48 is also information that defines a time limit for starting a part supply work (setup work) for the parts supply target device. For the parts supply work (setup work) for the parts supply target device, a work start time limit is set. The time limit for starting work is the time when the total number of remaining parts represented by the remaining part number information J15 reaches the remaining part number warning value, and the total remaining part number represented by the remaining part number information J15 is the remaining part number. Examples include the time when the stop value is reached and the time when the component supply target device cannot continue the component supply. That is, if the component supply operation for the component supply target device is not started before the time limit is reached, the possibility of the component supply stop by the component supply target device increases, which affects the production of the component mounting board.
　作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９は、後述の作業進捗判定部３４３による段取り作業（部品補給作業）の進捗状況の判定結果を表す情報である。作業標準時間情報Ｊ５０は、部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業（段取り作業）の作業開始から作業終了までに要する作業標準時間を表す情報である。作業標準時間情報Ｊ５０にて表される作業標準時間は、部品補給作業（段取り作業）の作業種ごとに設定されている。例えば、ＡＦ２４１Ａに対して新たなリールを補給する部品補給作業の作業標準時間は「３０秒」に設定され、トレイフィーダー２４５Ａに対して新たなパレットを補給する部品補給作業の作業標準時間は「５０秒」に設定され、スティックフィーダー２４６Ａに対して新たなスティックを補給する部品補給作業の作業標準時間は「４５秒」に設定されている。また、スプライシングフィーダーＳＰＦに対するスプライシング作業の作業標準時間は、例えば「９０秒」に設定されている。なお、作業標準時間情報Ｊ５０にて表される作業標準時間は、作業者ＯＰの各部品補給作業（段取り作業）に対する作業能力に応じて重み付け係数が付されたものであってもよい。 The work progress status information J49 is information representing the determination result of the progress status of the setup work (part replenishment work) by the work progress judgment unit 343 described later. The work standard time information J50 is information representing a work standard time required from the start of the part supply work (setup work) to the end of the work for the part supply target device. The work standard time represented by the work standard time information J50 is set for each work type of parts supply work (setup work). For example, the work standard time for parts supply work for supplying a new reel to the AF 241A is set to “30 seconds”, and the work standard time for parts supply work for supplying a new pallet to the tray feeder 245A is “50”. "Second", and the standard work time of parts supply work for supplying a new stick to the stick feeder 246A is set to "45 seconds". In addition, the work standard time of the splicing work for the splicing feeder SPF is set to “90 seconds”, for example. Note that the work standard time represented by the work standard time information J50 may be a weighting coefficient attached according to the work ability of the worker OP for each component supply work (setup work).
　滞在許容時間情報Ｊ５１は、作業対象領域番号情報Ｊ４２にて表される各作業対象領域（第１作業領域ＷＡ１、第３作業領域ＷＡ３、第４作業領域ＷＡ４、第６作業領域ＷＡ６）での、後述の無人搬送車６の滞在が許容される滞在許容時間を表す情報である。滞在許容時間情報Ｊ５１にて表される滞在許容時間は、各作業対象領域での部品補給作業（段取り作業）の作業種ごとの作業数と、作業標準時間情報Ｊ５０にて表される作業標準時間とに基づいて、算出することができる。具体的には、滞在許容時間は、作業対象領域ごとに算出されるものであり、部品補給作業の作業数と作業標準時間との乗算値の、作業種ごとの合計値で表される。 The allowable stay time information J51 is the work target area (first work area WA1, third work area WA3, fourth work area WA4, sixth work area WA6) represented by the work target area number information J42. It is the information showing the allowable stay time in which the below-mentioned automatic guided vehicle 6 is allowed to stay. The allowable stay time represented by the allowable stay time information J51 is the number of work for each work type of the component replenishment work (setup work) in each work target area and the standard work time represented by the work standard time information J50. And can be calculated based on the above. Specifically, the stay allowable time is calculated for each work target area, and is represented by a total value for each work type, which is a product of the number of parts supply work and the work standard time.
　＜作業進捗判定部について＞
　次に、作業進捗判定部３４３は、作業対象特定部３４２１により特定された作業対象領域の各々で実施される全ての段取り作業（部品補給作業）の進捗状況をリアルタイムに監視し、当該進捗状況が作業開始、作業終了、及び作業未実施の何れの状況であるかを判定する。作業進捗判定部３４３による段取り作業（部品補給作業）の進捗状況の判定結果を表す作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９は、前述したように、第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に付加される。 <About work progress judgment part>
Next, the work progress determination unit 343 monitors in real time the progress of all the setup work (part supply work) performed in each of the work target areas specified by the work target specifying unit 3421, and the progress status is determined. It is determined whether the situation is a work start, a work end, or a work not performed. As described above, the work progress status information J49 indicating the determination result of the progress status of the setup work (part supply work) by the work progress determination unit 343 is added to the first work list information JH4.
　作業進捗判定部３４３は、作業者ＯＰによる作業対象領域での段取り作業（部品補給作業）が未実施である場合、当該段取り作業の進捗状況を「作業未実施」と判定し、その判定結果を表す作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９を第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に付加する。図１３及び図１４に示す例では、作業進捗判定部３４３は、作業対象領域番号情報Ｊ４２にて表される作業対象領域（第３作業領域ＷＡ３、第４作業領域ＷＡ４、第６作業領域ＷＡ６）での段取り作業（部品補給作業）が「作業未実施」であると判定している。そして、作業進捗判定部３４３は、これらの作業対象領域に対応した作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９を、「未実施」としている。 When the setup work (parts supply work) in the work target area by the operator OP is not performed, the work progress determination unit 343 determines that the progress status of the setup work is “work not performed”, and the determination result is The work progress status information J49 to be represented is added to the first work list information JH4. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 13 and 14, the work progress determination unit 343 has a work target area (third work area WA3, fourth work area WA4, and sixth work area WA6) represented by the work target area number information J42. It is determined that the set-up work (part replenishment work) is “work not performed”. Then, the work progress determination unit 343 sets the work progress status information J49 corresponding to these work target areas as “not implemented”.
　作業対象領域番号情報Ｊ４２にて表される作業対象領域において、作業者ＯＰによるバーコードリーダ８を用いた部品種特定用バーコードの読取操作が行われると、当該作業対象領域が設定された部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０に、外部入出力部２０４を介して補給部品種情報ＪＨ０１（図１４）が入力される。補給部品種情報ＪＨ０１が入力された実装制御装置２０は、通信部２０１を介して当該補給部品種情報ＪＨ０１を作業計画管理装置３へ送信する。作業計画管理装置３では、実装制御装置２０から送信された補給部品種情報ＪＨ０１を通信部３１が受信すると、作業進捗判定部３４４は、第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に基づき部品補給作業の進捗状況が「作業未実施」から「作業開始」へ移行したと判定する。 In the work target area represented by the work target area number information J42, when the operation of reading the part type specifying barcode using the barcode reader 8 by the operator OP is performed, the part in which the work target area is set. Supply component type information JH01 (FIG. 14) is input to the mounting control device 20 of the mounting machine 2 via the external input / output unit 204. The mounting control device 20 to which the supply component type information JH01 is input transmits the supply component type information JH01 to the work plan management device 3 via the communication unit 201. In the work plan management device 3, when the communication unit 31 receives the supply component type information JH01 transmitted from the mounting control device 20, the work progress determination unit 344 indicates the progress status of the component supply work based on the first work list information JH4. It is determined that the “work has not been performed” has shifted to “work start”.
　より詳しく説明すると、作業進捗判定部３４４は、補給部品種情報ＪＨ０１が入力されると、当該補給部品種情報ＪＨ０１の部品種と同種の部品を表す部品種情報Ｊ１３と関連付けられたセット位置情報Ｊ１２を抽出する。そして、作業進捗判定部３４４は、抽出したセット位置情報Ｊ１２にて表されるセット位置に配置された部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業の進捗状況が、「作業未実施」から「作業開始」へ移行したと判定し、その判定結果を表す作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９を第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に付加する。図１３及び図１４に示す例では、作業進捗判定部３４３は、作業対象領域番号情報Ｊ４２にて表される作業対象領域である第１作業領域ＷＡ１において、セット位置情報Ｊ１２にて表されるセット位置「Ｓ１３」に配置されたスプライシングフィーダーＳＰＦに対するスプライシング作業の進捗状況が、「作業未実施」から「作業開始」へ移行したと判定している。そして、作業進捗判定部３４３は、セット位置情報Ｊ１２のセット位置「Ｓ１３」に対応した作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９を、「作業開始」としている。 More specifically, when the supply part type information JH01 is input, the work progress determination unit 344 receives the set position information J12 associated with the part type information J13 representing the same type of part as the part type of the supply part type information JH01. To extract. Then, the work progress determination unit 344 changes the progress status of the component supply work for the component supply target device arranged at the set position represented by the extracted set position information J12 from “work not performed” to “work start”. It determines with having transferred, and adds the work progress status information J49 showing the determination result to the 1st work list information JH4. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 13 and 14, the work progress determination unit 343 sets the set represented by the set position information J12 in the first work area WA1 that is the work target area represented by the work target area number information J42. It is determined that the progress status of the splicing work for the splicing feeder SPF arranged at the position “S13” has shifted from “work not performed” to “work start”. The work progress determination unit 343 sets the work progress status information J49 corresponding to the set position “S13” of the set position information J12 as “work start”.
　作業者ＯＰによるバーコードリーダ８を用いた部品種特定用バーコードの読取操作が行われた後に、部品補給対象装置から補給検知情報ＪＨ０２（図１４）が出力されると、フィーダー制御部２４０から実装制御装置２０へ補給検知情報ＪＨ０２が送信される。補給検知情報ＪＨ０２は、部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業が終了したことを表す情報である。例えば、部品補給対象装置がＡＦ２４１Ａである場合、第１テープ検知センサ２４１６Ａが部品収納テープを検知したときに当該第１テープ検知センサ２４１６Ａから出力される検知情報が、ＡＦ２４１Ａに対する部品補給作業が終了したことを表す補給検知情報ＪＨ０２となる。 When the supply detection information JH02 (FIG. 14) is output from the component supply target device after the operator OP performs the barcode reading operation for the component type using the barcode reader 8, the feeder control unit 240 outputs the supply detection information JH02. The supply detection information JH02 is transmitted to the mounting control device 20. The replenishment detection information JH02 is information indicating that the component replenishment work for the component replenishment target device has been completed. For example, when the component supply target apparatus is AF241A, the detection information output from the first tape detection sensor 2416A when the first tape detection sensor 2416A detects the component storage tape indicates that the component supply operation for the AF241A is completed. This is supply detection information JH02 representing this.
　補給検知情報ＪＨ０２が入力された実装制御装置２０は、通信部２０１を介して当該補給検知情報ＪＨ０２を作業計画管理装置３へ送信する。作業計画管理装置３では、実装制御装置２０から送信された補給検知情報ＪＨ０２を通信部３１が受信すると、作業進捗判定部３４４は、第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に基づき部品補給作業の進捗状況が「作業開始」から「作業終了」へ移行したと判定する。 The mounting control device 20 to which the replenishment detection information JH02 is input transmits the replenishment detection information JH02 to the work plan management device 3 via the communication unit 201. In the work plan management device 3, when the communication unit 31 receives the replenishment detection information JH02 transmitted from the mounting control device 20, the work progress determination unit 344 indicates that the progress status of the component replenishment work is “based on the first work list information JH4. It is determined that the operation has shifted from “work start” to “work end”.
　より詳しく説明すると、作業進捗判定部３４４は、補給検知情報ＪＨ０２が入力されると、当該補給検知情報ＪＨ０２を出力した部品補給対象装置が配置されたセット位置を表すセット位置情報Ｊ１２を抽出する。そして、作業進捗判定部３４４は、抽出したセット位置情報Ｊ１２にて表されるセット位置に配置された部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業の進捗状況が、「作業開始」から「作業終了」へ移行したと判定し、その判定結果を表す作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９を第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に付加する。図１３及び図１４に示す例では、作業進捗判定部３４３は、作業対象領域番号情報Ｊ４２にて表される作業対象領域である第１作業領域ＷＡ１において、セット位置情報Ｊ１２にて表されるセット位置「Ｓ１１」、「Ｓ１２」に配置されたＡＦ２４１Ａに対する部品補給作業の進捗状況が、「作業開始」から「作業終了」へ移行したと判定している。そして、作業進捗判定部３４３は、セット位置情報Ｊ１２のセット位置「Ｓ１１」、「Ｓ１２」に対応した作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９を、「作業終了」としている。 More specifically, when the replenishment detection information JH02 is input, the work progress determination unit 344 extracts set position information J12 representing the set position where the component replenishment target device that has output the replenishment detection information JH02 is arranged. Then, the work progress determination unit 344 shifts the progress status of the component supply work for the component supply target device arranged at the set position represented by the extracted set position information J12 from “work start” to “work end”. The work progress status information J49 representing the determination result is added to the first work list information JH4. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 13 and 14, the work progress determination unit 343 sets the set represented by the set position information J12 in the first work area WA1 that is the work target area represented by the work target area number information J42. It is determined that the progress of the component replenishment work for the AF 241A arranged at the positions “S11” and “S12” has shifted from “work start” to “work end”. The work progress determination unit 343 sets the work progress status information J49 corresponding to the set positions “S11” and “S12” of the set position information J12 as “work end”.
　作業対象特定部３４２１により生成され、作業進捗判定部３４３によりリアルタイムに更新される作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９が付加された第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４は、作業計画管理装置３の記憶部３４４に記憶されるとともに表示部３３に表示される。更には、第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４は、通信部３１を介して各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０、後述の無人搬送車６、及び携帯端末装置７に送信される。作業計画管理装置３の記憶部３４４は、作業対象特定部３４２１が所定の周期で作業対象領域の特定結果を更新することに応じて更新された第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４を記憶する。各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０に第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４が入力されると、実装制御装置２０の表示部２０３には当該第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４が表示される。また、作業者ＯＰが携帯する携帯端末装置７に第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４が入力されると、携帯端末装置７には当該第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４が表示される。また、無人搬送車６に第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４が入力されると、当該第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に基づき無人搬送車６の移動動作が制御される。 The first work list information JH4 generated by the work target specifying unit 3421 and added with the work progress status information J49 updated in real time by the work progress determination unit 343 is stored in the storage unit 344 of the work plan management device 3. At the same time, it is displayed on the display unit 33. Further, the first work list information JH4 is transmitted to the mounting control device 20, the automatic guided vehicle 6 described later, and the portable terminal device 7 via the communication unit 31. The storage unit 344 of the work plan management apparatus 3 stores the first work list information JH4 updated in response to the work target specifying unit 3421 updating the work target area specifying result in a predetermined cycle. When the first work list information JH4 is input to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2, the first work list information JH4 is displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20. When the first work list information JH4 is input to the mobile terminal device 7 carried by the worker OP, the first work list information JH4 is displayed on the mobile terminal device 7. When the first work list information JH4 is input to the automatic guided vehicle 6, the movement operation of the automatic guided vehicle 6 is controlled based on the first work list information JH4.
　［無人搬送車の構成］
　無人搬送車６は、図１４に示すように、部品実装ライン２Ｌの各部品実装機２に設定された作業領域ＷＡを通る所定の移動経路６Ｒに沿って、自動的に移動可能な搬送車である。無人搬送車６は、段取り作業用の物品Ｇを収容する荷台部６２を有する車体部６１と、移動制御部６３と、報知部６４とを含んで構成される。 [Configuration of automated guided vehicle]
As shown in FIG. 14, the automatic guided vehicle 6 is a guided vehicle that can automatically move along a predetermined movement path 6R passing through the work area WA set in each component mounting machine 2 of the component mounting line 2L. is there. The automatic guided vehicle 6 includes a vehicle body portion 61 having a loading platform portion 62 that accommodates an article G for setup work, a movement control portion 63, and a notification portion 64.
　荷台部６２に収容される段取り作業用の物品Ｇとしては、部品補給作業に必要な新たな部品収納部材（リール、パレット、スティック）や部品補給作業後に回収された回収物、並びに、部品補給作業以外の付随作業に必要な付随作業用の物品などが含まれる。 As an article G for setup work stored in the loading platform 62, new parts storage members (reels, pallets, sticks) necessary for parts supply work, recovered items collected after parts supply work, and parts supply work The goods for the incidental work required for the incidental work other than the above are included.
　移動制御部６３は、第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に基づいて、作業者ＯＰを誘導するように車体部６１を、作業対象領域番号情報Ｊ４２にて表される作業対象領域に順次移動させて停車させる誘導移動処理を実行する。図１３及び図１４に示す例では、移動制御部６３の誘導移動処理によって、無人搬送車６は、段取り作業用の物品Ｇを荷台部６２に収容した状態で、作業者ＯＰを誘導するように、作業対象領域番号情報Ｊ４２にて表される作業対象領域となる第１作業領域ＷＡ１、第３作業領域ＷＡ３、第４作業領域ＷＡ４、及び第６作業領域ＷＡ６に順次移動して停車する。これにより、作業者ＯＰは、無人搬送車６を目印として移動経路６Ｒに沿って移動し、無人搬送車６が停車した位置の作業対象領域において段取り作業（部品補給作業）を実施することができる。各作業対象領域において段取り作業を実施するに際しては、作業者ＯＰは、実装制御装置２０の表示部２０３、又は携帯端末装置７に表示された第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に基づいて、当該作業対象領域での段取り作業の内容を把握することができる。作業者ＯＰは、無人搬送車６を目印として移動し、段取り作業の対象となる部品実装機２を容易に把握することができ、更には第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に基づき段取り作業の内容を把握することができるのであるから、作業者ＯＰによる段取り作業の効率化を図ることが可能となる。 Based on the first work list information JH4, the movement control unit 63 sequentially moves the vehicle body 61 to the work target area represented by the work target area number information J42 so as to guide the worker OP and stops it. The guided movement process is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the automatic guided vehicle 6 guides the operator OP in the state where the article G for setup work is accommodated in the loading platform 62 by the guidance movement process of the movement control unit 63. The vehicle sequentially moves to and stops at the first work area WA1, the third work area WA3, the fourth work area WA4, and the sixth work area WA6 that are the work target areas represented by the work target area number information J42. Thereby, the operator OP can move along the movement path 6R using the automatic guided vehicle 6 as a mark, and can perform the setup work (parts supply work) in the work target area at the position where the automatic guided vehicle 6 stops. . When performing the setup work in each work target area, the worker OP selects the work target area based on the first work list information JH4 displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7. The contents of the setup work can be grasped. The operator OP can move with the automatic guided vehicle 6 as a mark, and can easily grasp the component mounter 2 to be set up, and further understand the contents of the set up work based on the first work list information JH4. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the setup work by the operator OP.
　本実施形態では、移動制御部６３は、第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に付加された作業進捗判定部３４３による段取り作業の進捗状況に関する判定結果を表す作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９に基づいて、前記誘導移動処理を実行する。これにより、移動制御部６３は、作業進捗判定部３４３により判定された作業開始、作業終了、作業未実施の、段取り作業のリアルタイムな進捗状況に基づいて、無人搬送車６の作業対象領域に対する移動を制御することができる。 In the present embodiment, the movement control unit 63 performs the guided movement process based on the work progress status information J49 representing the determination result regarding the progress status of the setup work by the work progress determination unit 343 added to the first work list information JH4. Execute. Accordingly, the movement control unit 63 moves the automatic guided vehicle 6 relative to the work target area based on the real-time progress status of the work start, work end, and work not performed, which is determined by the work progress determination unit 343. Can be controlled.
　＜作業進捗状況情報に基づく誘導移動処理の第１具体例＞
　移動制御部６３は、作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９にて表される作業進捗状況が「作業未実施」の段取り作業（部品補給作業）が存在する作業対象領域に車体部６１が停車している状態において、当該作業対象領域での全ての段取り作業の進捗状況が「作業終了」となったとき、次の移動先となる作業対象領域に向けて車体部６１を移動させて停車させる構成であってもよい。或いは、移動制御部６３は、車体部６１が停車中の作業対象領域において、１つの段取り作業以外の進捗状況が「作業終了」となり、且つ前記１つの段取り作業の進捗状況が「作業開始」となったときに、次の移動先となる作業対象領域に向けて車体部６１を移動させて停車させる構成であってもよい。 <First specific example of guided movement processing based on work progress information>
The movement control unit 63 is in a state where the vehicle body unit 61 is stopped in a work target region where a setup work (part supply work) whose work progress status is “work not performed” represented by the work progress status information J49 exists. Even when the progress status of all the setup work in the work target area is “work finished”, the vehicle body unit 61 is moved toward the work target area to be the next destination and stopped. Good. Alternatively, the movement control unit 63 determines that the progress status other than one setup work is “work end” and the progress status of the one setup work is “work start” in the work target area where the vehicle body 61 is stopped. When it becomes, the structure which moves the vehicle-body part 61 toward the work object area | region used as the next movement destination and stops may be sufficient.
　図１３及び図１４に示す例では、無人搬送車６は、第１作業領域ＷＡ１に停車している状態において、当該第１作業領域ＷＡ１の各セット位置「Ｓ１１」、「Ｓ１２」、「Ｓ１３」に配置された部品補給対象装置の全てに対する部品補給作業が「作業終了」となったときに、次の移動先となる第３作業領域ＷＡ３へ移動して停車する。或いは、無人搬送車６は、第１作業領域ＷＡ１に停車している状態において、セット位置「Ｓ１１」、「Ｓ１２」に配置された部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業が「作業終了」となり、且つ、セット位置「Ｓ１３」に配置された部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業が「作業開始」となったときに、次の移動先となる第３作業領域ＷＡ３へ移動して停車する。作業者ＯＰは、第３作業領域ＷＡ３での作業内容を、実装制御装置２０の表示部２０３、又は携帯端末装置７に表示された第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に基づき把握することができる。このような誘導移動処理が移動制御部６３によって実行されると、作業者ＯＰは、無人搬送車６が停車している作業対象領域内で実施すべき全ての段取り作業を終了させた上で、無人搬送車６を目印として次の作業対象領域に移動することができる。これにより、作業未実施の状態のままの段取り作業が残存して累積されることを可及的に抑止することができる。 In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the automatic guided vehicle 6 is in the state of stopping in the first work area WA1, and each set position “S11”, “S12”, “S13” of the first work area WA1. When the parts supply work for all of the parts supply target devices arranged in “No” is “work finished”, the vehicle moves to the third work area WA3 as the next destination and stops. Alternatively, in the state where the automatic guided vehicle 6 is stopped in the first work area WA1, the parts supply work for the parts supply target devices arranged at the set positions “S11” and “S12” becomes “work end”, and When the component supply operation for the component supply target device arranged at the set position “S13” becomes “work start”, the vehicle moves to the third work area WA3 as the next movement destination and stops. The worker OP can grasp the work content in the third work area WA3 based on the first work list information JH4 displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7. When such a guided movement process is executed by the movement control unit 63, the operator OP, after finishing all the setup work to be performed in the work target area where the automatic guided vehicle 6 is stopped, The automatic guided vehicle 6 can be used as a mark to move to the next work target area. Thereby, it can suppress as much as possible that the setup work in the state where work is not performed remains and accumulates.
　＜作業進捗状況情報に基づく誘導移動処理の第２具体例＞
　前述したように、第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４には、作業標準時間情報Ｊ５０と関連付けられた滞在許容時間情報Ｊ５１が含まれている。移動制御部６３は、作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９にて表される作業進捗状況が「作業未実施」の段取り作業（部品補給作業）が存在する作業対象領域に車体部６１が停車している状態において、滞在許容時間情報Ｊ５１にて表される滞在許容時間が経過したときに、次の移動先となる作業対象領域に向けて車体部６１を移動させて停車させる構成であってもよい。 <Second specific example of guided movement processing based on work progress information>
As described above, the first work list information JH4 includes the allowable stay time information J51 associated with the work standard time information J50. The movement control unit 63 is in a state where the vehicle body unit 61 is stopped in a work target region where a setup work (part supply work) whose work progress status is “work not performed” represented by the work progress status information J49 exists. When the allowable stay time represented by the allowable stay time information J51 elapses, the vehicle body 61 may be moved and stopped toward the work target area to be the next destination.
　図１３及び図１４に示す例では、無人搬送車６は、第１作業領域ＷＡ１に停車している状態において、滞在許容時間情報Ｊ５１にて表される、第１作業領域ＷＡ１に対応した滞在許容時間「ＳＰ１」が経過したときに、次の移動先となる第３作業領域ＷＡ３へ移動して停車する。作業者ＯＰは、第３作業領域ＷＡ３での作業内容を、実装制御装置２０の表示部２０３、又は携帯端末装置７に表示された第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４に基づき把握することができる。このような誘導移動処理が移動制御部６３によって実行されると、無人搬送車６は、段取り作業ごとに個別に設定された作業標準時間に基づく滞在許容時間の経過を基準として、作業対象領域に順次移動して停車する。これにより、作業者ＯＰは、無人搬送車６が停車している滞在許容時間を、作業対象領域内での全ての段取り作業を終了させるために要する全作業時間の目安とし、段取り作業を実施することができる。このため、作業者ＯＰは、無人搬送車６の移動、停車の周期を作業周期として、各作業対象領域での段取り作業を実施することができる。 In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the automated guided vehicle 6 stays in the first work area WA1 and is allowed to stay corresponding to the first work area WA1 represented by the stay allowable time information J51. When the time “SP1” has elapsed, the vehicle moves to the third work area WA3, which is the next destination, and stops. The worker OP can grasp the work content in the third work area WA3 based on the first work list information JH4 displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7. When such a guided movement process is executed by the movement control unit 63, the automatic guided vehicle 6 enters the work target area based on the elapse of the allowable stay time based on the work standard time set individually for each setup work. Move sequentially and stop. As a result, the worker OP performs the set-up work using the allowable stay time during which the automatic guided vehicle 6 is stopped as a guideline for the total work time required to complete all the set-up work in the work target area. be able to. For this reason, the worker OP can perform the setup work in each work target area, with the period of movement and stop of the automatic guided vehicle 6 as the work period.
　また、無人搬送車６の報知部６４は、車体部６１の停車時間が滞在許容時間情報Ｊ５１にて表される滞在許容時間に達するまでの残り時間を計時し、前記残り時間が所定の閾値に達したときに、その旨を報知する。これにより、作業者ＯＰは、報知部６４による報知を目安として、各作業対象領域での段取り作業を実施することができる。 In addition, the notification unit 64 of the automatic guided vehicle 6 measures the remaining time until the stop time of the vehicle body 61 reaches the allowable stay time represented by the allowable stay time information J51, and sets the remaining time to a predetermined threshold. When it reaches, it will notify you. Thereby, the worker OP can carry out the setup work in each work target area using the notification by the notification unit 64 as a guide.
　＜作業進捗状況情報に基づく誘導移動処理の第３具体例＞
　前述したように、第１作業リスト情報ＪＨ４には、部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業（段取り作業）の作業開始の制限時刻を規定する情報として、警告時間情報Ｊ４６、停止時間情報Ｊ４７及び生産可能時間情報Ｊ４８が含まれている。作業進捗判定部３４３は、前記制限時刻に基づき作業開始を優先させるべき段取り作業となる優先作業の存在を認識すると、作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９を更新する。図１５は、作業進捗判定部３４３が優先作業の存在を認識した場合に更新された第２作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ａを説明するための図である。図１５に示す例では、第１作業領域ＷＡ１内の全ての部品補給作業の進捗状況が「作業終了」とされ、第３作業領域ＷＡ３におけるセット位置「Ｓ３１」、「Ｓ３２」に配置された部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業の進捗状況が「作業終了」とされている。そして、第６作業領域ＷＡ６におけるセット位置「Ｓ６２」に配置された部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業が、警告時間情報Ｊ４６、停止時間情報Ｊ４７及び生産可能時間情報Ｊ４８にて表される前記制限時刻が迫っている優先作業として示されている。 <Third specific example of guided movement processing based on work progress information>
As described above, in the first work list information JH4, the warning time information J46, the stop time information J47, and the production are possible as information for defining the start time of the parts supply work (setup work) for the parts supply target device. Time information J48 is included. The work progress determination unit 343 updates the work progress status information J49 when recognizing the presence of a priority work that is a set-up work that should be prioritized based on the time limit. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the second work list information JH4A updated when the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the presence of the priority work. In the example shown in FIG. 15, the progress status of all the component supply operations in the first work area WA1 is “work end”, and the parts placed in the set positions “S31” and “S32” in the third work area WA3. The progress status of the component replenishment work for the replenishment target device is “work completion”. Then, the parts supply work for the parts supply target device arranged at the set position “S62” in the sixth work area WA6 is expressed by the warning time information J46, the stop time information J47, and the production possible time information J48. Is shown as an impending priority task.
　作業進捗判定部３４３は、セット位置「Ｓ６２」に配置された部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業が優先作業であると認識すると、部品補給作業の進捗状況が「作業終了」とされたセット位置「Ｓ３２」以降の、セット位置「Ｓ６２」に至るまでの各セット位置「Ｓ３３」、「Ｓ３４」、「Ｓ３５」、「Ｓ４１」、「Ｓ４２」、「Ｓ６１」に対応した部品補給作業の進捗状況を、「スキップ」状態とする。作業進捗判定部３４３によって作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９が「スキップ」状態とされた部品補給作業は、優先作業の実施を優先させるために、実施が先送りされた段取り作業となる。 When the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes that the component supply operation for the component supply target device arranged at the set position “S62” is the priority operation, the progress position of the component supply operation is set to “set position“ The progress of the component supply work corresponding to each set position “S33”, “S34”, “S35”, “S41”, “S42”, “S61” up to the set position “S62” after S32 ” , “Skip” state. The parts supply work whose work progress status information J49 is set to the “skip” state by the work progress determination unit 343 is a setup work whose execution has been postponed in order to prioritize the execution of the priority work.
　作業進捗判定部３４３が優先作業の存在を認識し、作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９が更新された第２作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ａは、通信部３１を介して各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０、無人搬送車６、及び携帯端末装置７に送信される。各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０に第２作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ａが入力されると、実装制御装置２０の表示部２０３には当該第２作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ａが表示される。また、作業者ＯＰが携帯する携帯端末装置７に第２作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ａが入力されると、携帯端末装置７には当該第２作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ａが表示される。また、無人搬送車６に第２作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ａが入力されると、当該第２作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ａに基づき無人搬送車６の移動動作が制御される。 The work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the presence of the priority work, and the second work list information JH4A in which the work progress status information J49 is updated is sent to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2 via the communication unit 31 and unmanned conveyance. It is transmitted to the car 6 and the mobile terminal device 7. When the second work list information JH4A is input to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2, the second work list information JH4A is displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20. When the second work list information JH4A is input to the mobile terminal device 7 carried by the worker OP, the second work list information JH4A is displayed on the mobile terminal device 7. When the second work list information JH4A is input to the automatic guided vehicle 6, the movement operation of the automatic guided vehicle 6 is controlled based on the second work list information JH4A.
　図１６は、移動制御部６３により実行される、第２作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ａに基づく誘導移動処理を説明するための図である。移動制御部６３は、警告時間情報Ｊ４６、停止時間情報Ｊ４７及び生産可能時間情報Ｊ４８にて表される前記制限時刻に基づき優先作業の存在を認識すると、車体部６１が停車中の作業対象領域における段取り作業の進捗状況に関わらず、前記優先作業に対応した作業対象領域に向けて車体部６１を移動させて停車させる。 FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the guided movement process based on the second work list information JH4A, which is executed by the movement control unit 63. When the movement control unit 63 recognizes the presence of priority work based on the time limit represented by the warning time information J46, the stop time information J47, and the production possible time information J48, the movement control unit 63 in the work target area where the vehicle body unit 61 is stopped. Regardless of the progress of the setup work, the vehicle body 61 is moved toward the work target area corresponding to the priority work and stopped.
　図１５及び図１６に示す例では、移動制御部６３によって第６作業領域ＷＡ６のセット位置「Ｓ６２」に優先作業の存在が認識されると、無人搬送車６は、第３作業領域ＷＡ３に停車している状態において、当該第３作業領域ＷＡ３における段取り作業の進捗状況に関わらず、第４作業領域ＷＡ４を通過して、優先作業に対応した第６作業領域ＷＡ６に移動して停車する。このように、作業開始の制限時刻が迫っている優先作業が存在する場合、無人搬送車６は、その優先作業を実施すべき作業対象領域となる第６作業領域ＷＡ６に向けて急行して停車する。この無人搬送車６が停車した第６作業領域ＷＡ６に移動することにより、作業者ＯＰは、優先作業を実施することができる。作業者ＯＰは、第６作業領域ＷＡ６での優先作業の作業内容を、実装制御装置２０の表示部２０３、又は携帯端末装置７に表示された第２作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ａに基づき把握することができる。なお、第６作業領域ＷＡ６のセット位置「Ｓ６２」での優先作業の実施を優先させるために、実施が先送りされた（「スキップ」状態とされた）、各セット位置「Ｓ３３」、「Ｓ３４」、「Ｓ３５」、「Ｓ４１」、「Ｓ４２」、「Ｓ６１」に対応した部品補給作業は、次回の作業計画に組み込まれる。 In the example shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, when the movement control unit 63 recognizes the presence of priority work at the set position “S62” of the sixth work area WA6, the automatic guided vehicle 6 stops in the third work area WA3. In this state, the vehicle passes through the fourth work area WA4, moves to the sixth work area WA6 corresponding to the priority work, and stops regardless of the progress of the setup work in the third work area WA3. As described above, when there is a priority work whose work start time is approaching, the automatic guided vehicle 6 stops immediately after moving toward the sixth work area WA6 as a work target area where the priority work should be performed. To do. By moving the automatic guided vehicle 6 to the sixth work area WA6 where the vehicle is stopped, the worker OP can perform the priority work. The worker OP can grasp the work contents of the priority work in the sixth work area WA6 based on the second work list information JH4A displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7. . In order to give priority to the execution of the priority work at the set position “S62” of the sixth work area WA6, the execution is postponed (“skip” state), and the set positions “S33”, “S34”. , “S35”, “S41”, “S42”, “S61”, the parts supply work is incorporated into the next work plan.
　＜作業進捗状況情報に基づく誘導移動処理の第４具体例＞
　図１７は、作業進捗判定部３４３が段取り作業の開始不可を認識した場合に更新された第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂを説明するための図である。図１８は、移動制御部６３により実行される、第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂに基づく誘導移動処理を説明するための図である。 <Fourth Specific Example of Guided Movement Processing Based on Work Progress Information>
FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing the third work list information JH4B updated when the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes that the setup work cannot be started. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the guided movement process based on the third work list information JH4B, which is executed by the movement control unit 63.
　部品実装ライン２Ｌの各部品実装機２における実装制御装置２０から作業開始可否情報ＪＨ０３（図１８）が出力される場合がある。作業開始可否情報ＪＨ０３は、作業未実施の段取り作業に対する作業開始の可否を表す情報である。例えば、部品実装機２に設定された作業領域ＷＡに配置された部品供給装置２４１，２４５，２４６において、新たな部品収納部材を補給する部品補給作業の開始が不可である場合には、部品補給作業の開始が不可であることを示す作業開始可否情報ＪＨ０３が実装制御装置２０から出力される。 Work start availability information JH03 (FIG. 18) may be output from the mounting control device 20 in each component mounting machine 2 of the component mounting line 2L. The work start availability information JH03 is information representing the availability of work start for a setup work that has not been performed. For example, in the component supply devices 241, 245, and 246 arranged in the work area WA set in the component mounter 2, when it is impossible to start a component supply operation for supplying a new component storage member, the component supply Work start availability information JH03 indicating that the work cannot be started is output from the mounting control device 20.
　実装制御装置２０から出力された作業開始可否情報ＪＨ０３は、通信部３１（第１情報取得部）を介して作業計画管理装置３に入力される。作業計画管理装置３に作業開始可否情報ＪＨ０３が入力されると、作業進捗判定部３４３は、作業開始可否情報ＪＨ０３を出力した実装制御装置２０に対応した部品実装機２の作業領域ＷＡでの段取り作業の開始が可能であるか否かを判断する。作業開始可否情報ＪＨ０３に基づき段取り作業の開始が不可であると判断すると、作業進捗判定部３４３は、作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９を更新する。図１７に示す第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂは、作業進捗判定部３４３が段取り作業の開始不可を認識した場合に更新された作業リスト情報である。 The work start availability information JH03 output from the mounting control device 20 is input to the work plan management device 3 via the communication unit 31 (first information acquisition unit). When the work start availability information JH03 is input to the work plan management device 3, the work progress determination unit 343 sets up in the work area WA of the component mounter 2 corresponding to the mounting control device 20 that has output the work start availability information JH03. It is determined whether the work can be started. If it is determined that the setup work cannot be started based on the work start availability information JH03, the work progress determination unit 343 updates the work progress status information J49. The third work list information JH4B illustrated in FIG. 17 is work list information updated when the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes that the setup work cannot be started.
　図１７及び図１８に示す例では、第１作業領域ＷＡ１に無人搬送車６が停車し、当該第１作業領域ＷＡ１内の全ての部品補給作業の進捗状況が「作業終了」とされている。そして、第３作業領域ＷＡ３が設定された第３部品実装機２Ｃの実装制御装置２０から作業開始可否情報ＪＨ０３が出力されている。作業進捗判定部３４３は、作業開始可否情報ＪＨ０３に基づき第３作業領域ＷＡ３での部品補給作業の開始が不可であると判断すると、第３作業領域ＷＡ３内の各セット位置「Ｓ３１」、「Ｓ３２」、「Ｓ３３」、「Ｓ３４」、「Ｓ３５」に対応した部品補給作業の進捗状況を、「保留」状態とする。作業進捗判定部３４３によって作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９が「保留」状態とされた部品補給作業は、作業開始が可能となるまで待機される段取り作業となる。 In the example shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the automatic guided vehicle 6 stops in the first work area WA1, and the progress status of all the parts supply work in the first work area WA1 is “work finished”. The work start availability information JH03 is output from the mounting control device 20 of the third component mounter 2C in which the third work area WA3 is set. When the work progress determination unit 343 determines that the parts supply work cannot be started in the third work area WA3 based on the work start availability information JH03, the set positions “S31” and “S32” in the third work area WA3. ”,“ S33 ”,“ S34 ”, and“ S35 ”, the progress status of the component supply work is set to the“ pending ”state. The parts replenishment work in which the work progress status information J49 is set to the “pending” state by the work progress determination unit 343 is a setup work that is on standby until the work can be started.
　作業進捗判定部３４３が作業開始可否情報ＪＨ０３に基づき段取り作業の開始不可を認識し、作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９が更新された第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂは、通信部３１を介して各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０、無人搬送車６、及び携帯端末装置７に送信される。各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０に第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂが入力されると、実装制御装置２０の表示部２０３には当該第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂが表示される。また、作業者ＯＰが携帯する携帯端末装置７に第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂが入力されると、携帯端末装置７には当該第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂが表示される。また、無人搬送車６に第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂが入力されると、当該第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂに基づき無人搬送車６の移動動作が制御される。 The work progress determination unit 343 recognizes that the setup work cannot be started based on the work start availability information JH03, and the third work list information JH4B in which the work progress status information J49 is updated is sent to each component mounter 2 via the communication unit 31. Are transmitted to the mounting control device 20, the automatic guided vehicle 6, and the portable terminal device 7. When the third work list information JH4B is input to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2, the third work list information JH4B is displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20. When the third work list information JH4B is input to the mobile terminal device 7 carried by the worker OP, the third work list information JH4B is displayed on the mobile terminal device 7. When the third work list information JH4B is input to the automatic guided vehicle 6, the movement operation of the automatic guided vehicle 6 is controlled based on the third work list information JH4B.
　移動制御部６３は、車体部６１の停車中において、第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂに基づき、次の移動先となる作業対象領域での段取り作業の開始が不可であると判断すると、当該作業対象領域への車体部６１の移動を不許可とし、段取り作業の開始が可能となるまで車体部６１を待機させる。 When the movement control unit 63 determines that it is impossible to start the setup work in the work target area as the next movement destination based on the third work list information JH4B while the vehicle body part 61 is stopped, the work target area The vehicle body 61 is not allowed to move to the position, and the vehicle body 61 is put on standby until the setup work can be started.
　図１７及び図１８に示す例では、移動制御部６３は、無人搬送車６が第１作業領域ＷＡ１で停車している状態において、次の移動先の作業対象領域となる第３作業領域ＷＡ３での段取り作業の開始が不可であると判断している。この場合、無人搬送車６は、第３作業領域ＷＡ３への移動が不許可とされ、当該第３作業領域ＷＡ３での段取り作業の開始が可能となるまで第１作業領域ＷＡ１で待機する。このように、次の移動先の作業対象領域での段取り作業の開始が不可である場合、無人搬送車６は、その場で待機する。作業者ＯＰは、無人搬送車６が待機している状態を認識することにより、次の作業対象領域での段取り作業の開始が不可であることを把握することができる。また、作業者ＯＰは、次の作業対象領域での段取り作業の開始が不可であることを、実装制御装置２０の表示部２０３、又は携帯端末装置７に表示された第３作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｂに基づき把握することもできる。 In the example shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the movement control unit 63 is in the third work area WA3 that is the next work target area in the state where the automatic guided vehicle 6 is stopped in the first work area WA1. It is determined that it is impossible to start the setup work. In this case, the automatic guided vehicle 6 is not allowed to move to the third work area WA3 and waits in the first work area WA1 until the setup work in the third work area WA3 can be started. As described above, when it is impossible to start the setup work in the work area of the next movement destination, the automatic guided vehicle 6 stands by on the spot. The operator OP can recognize that the setup work in the next work target area cannot be started by recognizing the state where the automatic guided vehicle 6 is waiting. Further, the operator OP indicates in the third work list information JH4B displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7 that the setup work cannot be started in the next work target area. It is also possible to grasp based on this.
　＜作業進捗状況情報に基づく誘導移動処理の第５具体例＞
　図１９は、作業進捗判定部３４３が緊急作業の存在を認識した場合に更新された第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃを説明するための図である。図２０は、移動制御部６３により実行される、第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃに基づく誘導移動処理を説明するための図である。 <Fifth Specific Example of Guided Movement Processing Based on Work Progress Information>
FIG. 19 is a diagram for describing the fourth work list information JH4C updated when the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the presence of an emergency work. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the guided movement process based on the fourth work list information JH4C, which is executed by the movement control unit 63.
　部品実装ライン２Ｌの各部品実装機２における実装制御装置２０から緊急要請情報ＪＨ０４（図２０）が出力される場合がある。緊急要請情報ＪＨ０４は、部品実装機２に対する緊急作業の実施の要請を表す情報である。緊急作業は、緊急性の高い、段取り作業とは異種の作業であって、例えば部品実装機２の動作トラブルなどを解消するための作業である。 Urgent request information JH04 (FIG. 20) may be output from the mounting control device 20 in each component mounting machine 2 of the component mounting line 2L. The emergency request information JH04 is information representing a request for performing an emergency operation on the component mounter 2. The urgent work is a urgent and different work from the setup work, and is a work for solving an operation trouble of the component mounter 2, for example.
　実装制御装置２０から出力された緊急要請情報ＪＨ０４は、通信部３１（第２情報取得部）を介して作業計画管理装置３に入力される。作業計画管理装置３に緊急要請情報ＪＨ０４が入力されると、作業進捗判定部３４３は、緊急要請情報ＪＨ０４を出力した実装制御装置２０に対応した部品実装機２に対して実施すべき緊急作業が存在することを認識する。緊急作業の存在を認識すると、作業進捗判定部３４３は、作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９を更新する。図１９に示す第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃは、作業進捗判定部３４３が緊急作業の存在を認識した場合に更新された作業リスト情報である。 The emergency request information JH04 output from the mounting control device 20 is input to the work plan management device 3 via the communication unit 31 (second information acquisition unit). When the emergency request information JH04 is input to the work plan management apparatus 3, the work progress determination unit 343 performs an emergency work to be performed on the component mounter 2 corresponding to the mounting control apparatus 20 that has output the emergency request information JH04. Recognize that it exists. When recognizing the presence of the emergency work, the work progress determination unit 343 updates the work progress status information J49. The fourth work list information JH4C illustrated in FIG. 19 is work list information updated when the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the presence of an emergency work.
　図１９及び図２０に示す例では、第１作業領域ＷＡ１内の全ての部品補給作業の進捗状況が「作業終了」とされ、第３作業領域ＷＡ３におけるセット位置「Ｓ３１」、「Ｓ３２」に配置された部品補給対象装置に対する部品補給作業の進捗状況が「作業終了」とされている。そして、第３作業領域ＷＡ３に無人搬送車６が停車している状態において、第５作業領域ＷＡ５が設定された第５部品実装機２Ｅの実装制御装置２０から緊急要請情報ＪＨ０４が出力されている。作業進捗判定部３４３は、緊急要請情報ＪＨ０４に基づき第５部品実装機２Ｅに対して実施すべき緊急作業の存在を認識すると、第５作業領域ＷＡ５で実施すべき緊急作業が存在することを示す、作業進捗状況として「緊急作業」が付された情報を作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９に挿入する。更に、作業進捗判定部３４３は、部品補給作業の進捗状況が「作業終了」とされたセット位置「Ｓ３２」以降の、挿入した「緊急作業」に至るまでの各セット位置「Ｓ３３」、「Ｓ３４」、「Ｓ３５」、「Ｓ４１」、「Ｓ４２」に対応した部品補給作業の進捗状況を、「スキップ」状態とする。作業進捗判定部３４３によって作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９が「スキップ」状態とされた部品補給作業は、緊急作業の実施を優先させるために、実施が先送りされた段取り作業となる。 In the example shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the progress status of all the parts supply work in the first work area WA1 is “work end”, and is arranged at the set positions “S31” and “S32” in the third work area WA3. The progress status of the component replenishment work for the device to be replenished parts is “work completed”. Then, in a state where the automatic guided vehicle 6 is stopped in the third work area WA3, the emergency request information JH04 is output from the mounting control device 20 of the fifth component mounting machine 2E in which the fifth work area WA5 is set. . When the work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the existence of an emergency work to be performed on the fifth component mounter 2E based on the emergency request information JH04, it indicates that there is an emergency work to be performed in the fifth work area WA5. Then, information with “emergency work” added as the work progress status is inserted into the work progress status information J49. Further, the work progress determination unit 343 sets each of the set positions “S33” and “S34” after the set position “S32” where the progress status of the component supply work is “work finished” until the inserted “emergency work”. ”,“ S35 ”,“ S41 ”, and“ S42 ”, the progress status of the component supply operation is set to the“ skip ”state. The parts supply work whose work progress status information J49 is set to the “skip” state by the work progress determination unit 343 is a setup work whose execution has been postponed in order to prioritize the execution of the emergency work.
　作業進捗判定部３４３が緊急要請情報ＪＨ０４に基づき緊急作業の存在を認識し、作業進捗状況情報Ｊ４９が更新された第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃは、通信部３１を介して各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０、無人搬送車６、及び携帯端末装置７に送信される。各部品実装機２の実装制御装置２０に第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃが入力されると、実装制御装置２０の表示部２０３には当該第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃが表示される。また、作業者ＯＰが携帯する携帯端末装置７に第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃが入力されると、携帯端末装置７には当該第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃが表示される。また、無人搬送車６に第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃが入力されると、当該第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃに基づき無人搬送車６の移動動作が制御される。 The work progress determination unit 343 recognizes the presence of the emergency work based on the emergency request information JH04, and the fourth work list information JH4C in which the work progress status information J49 is updated is mounted on each component mounter 2 via the communication unit 31. It is transmitted to the control device 20, the automatic guided vehicle 6, and the mobile terminal device 7. When the fourth work list information JH4C is input to the mounting control device 20 of each component mounter 2, the fourth work list information JH4C is displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20. Further, when the fourth work list information JH4C is input to the mobile terminal device 7 carried by the worker OP, the fourth work list information JH4C is displayed on the mobile terminal device 7. When the fourth work list information JH4C is input to the automatic guided vehicle 6, the movement operation of the automatic guided vehicle 6 is controlled based on the fourth work list information JH4C.
　移動制御部６３は、緊急要請情報ＪＨ０４に応じて更新された第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃに基づき、緊急作業の存在を認識すると、車体部６１が停車中の作業対象領域における段取り作業の進捗状況に関わらず、緊急要請情報ＪＨ０４を出力した部品実装機２の作業領域ＷＡに向けて車体部６１を移動させて停車させる。 When the movement control unit 63 recognizes the presence of the emergency work based on the fourth work list information JH4C updated according to the emergency request information JH04, the movement control unit 63 determines the progress of the setup work in the work target area where the vehicle body part 61 is stopped. Regardless, the vehicle body 61 is moved toward the work area WA of the component mounter 2 that has output the emergency request information JH04 and stopped.
　図１９及び図２０に示す例では、移動制御部６３は、無人搬送車６が第１作業領域ＷＡ１で停車している状態において、第５作業領域ＷＡ５が設定された第５部品実装機２Ｅに対して実施すべき緊急作業の存在を認識している。この場合、無人搬送車６は、第３作業領域ＷＡ３における段取り作業の進捗状況に関わらず、第４作業領域ＷＡ４を通過して、緊急作業に対応した第５作業領域ＷＡ５に移動して停車する。このように、段取り作業とは異種の緊急作業が存在する場合、無人搬送車６は、その緊急作業を実施すべき第５部品実装機２Ｅの第５作業領域ＷＡ５に向けて急行して停車する。この無人搬送車６が停車した第５作業領域ＷＡ５に移動することにより、作業者ＯＰは、緊急作業を実施することができる。作業者ＯＰは、第５作業領域ＷＡ５での緊急作業の作業内容を、実装制御装置２０の表示部２０３、又は携帯端末装置７に表示された第４作業リスト情報ＪＨ４Ｃに基づき把握することができる。なお、第５作業領域ＷＡ５での緊急作業の実施を優先させるために、実施が先送りされた（「スキップ」状態とされた）、各セット位置「Ｓ３３」、「Ｓ３４」、「Ｓ３５」、「Ｓ４１」、「Ｓ４２」に対応した部品補給作業は、次回の作業計画に組み込まれる。また、第５作業領域ＷＡ５での緊急作業の緊急性が低い場合には、各セット位置「Ｓ３３」、「Ｓ３４」、「Ｓ３５」、「Ｓ４１」、「Ｓ４２」に対応した部品補給作業の実施を先送りしない（「スキップ」状態とはしない）ようにしてもよい。 In the example shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the movement control unit 63 applies to the fifth component mounting machine 2E in which the fifth work area WA5 is set while the automatic guided vehicle 6 is stopped in the first work area WA1. Recognizes the existence of urgent work to be carried out. In this case, the automatic guided vehicle 6 passes through the fourth work area WA4, moves to the fifth work area WA5 corresponding to the emergency work, and stops regardless of the progress of the setup work in the third work area WA3. . As described above, when there is an emergency work different from the setup work, the automatic guided vehicle 6 stops suddenly toward the fifth work area WA5 of the fifth component mounter 2E on which the emergency work is to be performed. . By moving the automatic guided vehicle 6 to the fifth work area WA5 where the vehicle is stopped, the worker OP can perform emergency work. The worker OP can grasp the work contents of the emergency work in the fifth work area WA5 based on the fourth work list information JH4C displayed on the display unit 203 of the mounting control device 20 or the mobile terminal device 7. . In addition, in order to prioritize the implementation of the emergency work in the fifth work area WA5, each set position “S33”, “S34”, “S35”, “ The parts supply work corresponding to “S41” and “S42” is incorporated into the next work plan. When the urgency of the emergency work in the fifth work area WA5 is low, the parts supply work corresponding to each set position “S33”, “S34”, “S35”, “S41”, “S42” is performed. May not be postponed (not set to the “skip” state).
　なお、上述した具体的実施形態には以下の構成を有する発明が主に含まれている。 The specific embodiments described above mainly include inventions having the following configurations.
　本発明の一の局面に係る部品実装システムは、基板に部品を搭載し部品搭載基板を生産する部品実装機が複数連結された部品実装ラインと、前記複数の部品実装機の各々に予め設定された作業領域内における、前記部品搭載基板の生産に応じて作業者が実施すべき段取り作業の計画を管理する作業計画管理装置と、前記各作業領域を通る所定の移動経路に沿って自動的に移動可能な無人搬送車と、を備える。前記作業計画管理装置は、前記各作業領域のうち、前記作業者による前記段取り作業の作業対象となる作業対象領域を特定する作業対象特定部を含む。前記無人搬送車は、前記段取り作業用の物品を収容する荷台部を有する車体部と、前記作業者を誘導するように前記車体部を前記作業対象領域に順次移動させて停車させる誘導移動処理を実行する移動制御部と、を含む。 A component mounting system according to one aspect of the present invention is preset in each of a component mounting line in which a plurality of component mounting machines for mounting a component on a board and producing a component mounting board are connected, and each of the plurality of component mounting machines. A work plan management device for managing a plan of a setup work to be performed by an operator in accordance with production of the component mounting board in the work area, and automatically along a predetermined movement path passing through each work area. A movable automatic guided vehicle. The work plan management apparatus includes a work target specifying unit that specifies a work target area that is a work target of the setup work by the worker among the work areas. The automatic guided vehicle has a vehicle body portion having a loading platform portion that accommodates the set-up work article, and a guided movement process in which the vehicle body portion is sequentially moved to the work target area so as to guide the worker. A movement control unit to be executed.
　この部品実装システムによれば、部品実装ラインの各部品実装機に設定された作業領域のうち、作業者による段取り作業の作業対象となる作業対象領域が、作業計画管理装置の作業対象特定部により特定される。そして、無人搬送車は、段取り作業用の物品を荷台部に収容した状態で、作業者を誘導するように、作業対象領域に順次移動して停車する。これにより、作業者は、無人搬送車を目印として移動経路に沿って移動し、無人搬送車が停車した位置の作業対象領域において段取り作業を実施することができる。作業者は、無人搬送車を目印として移動し、段取り作業の対象となる部品実装機を容易に把握することができるのであるから、作業者による段取り作業の効率化を図ることが可能となる。 According to this component mounting system, among the work areas set for each component mounter on the component mounting line, the work target area that is the work target of the setup work by the worker is determined by the work target specifying unit of the work plan management apparatus. Identified. Then, the automatic guided vehicle sequentially moves to the work target area and stops so as to guide the worker in a state where the article for the setup work is accommodated in the loading platform. Thus, the worker can move along the movement route using the automatic guided vehicle as a mark, and can perform the setup work in the work target area at the position where the automatic guided vehicle stops. Since the operator can use the automatic guided vehicle as a mark and can easily grasp the component mounting machine to be set up, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the set-up work by the operator.
　上記の部品実装システムにおいて、前記複数の部品実装機の各々は、前記作業領域内に並設され、部品が収納された部品収納部材を装着可能な複数の部品供給装置を含み、前記段取り作業は、前記部品供給装置に対して前記部品収納部材を補給する部品補給作業を含み、前記作業対象特定部は、前記部品補給作業が可能な部品供給装置である部品補給対象装置が配置される作業領域を、前記作業対象領域として特定する構成であってもよい。 In the component mounting system described above, each of the plurality of component mounting machines includes a plurality of component supply devices that are arranged in parallel in the work area and are capable of mounting a component storage member in which components are stored. , Including a component supply operation for supplying the component storage member to the component supply device, wherein the work target specifying unit is a work area in which a component supply target device that is a component supply device capable of performing the component supply operation is disposed. May be specified as the work target area.
　この態様では、部品補給作業を実施すべき部品補給対象装置となる部品供給装置が配置された作業対象領域が存在する場合、当該作業対象領域に向かって無人搬送車が移動して停車する。これにより、作業者は、無人搬送車を目印として移動し、無人搬送車が停車した位置の作業対象領域において、部品供給装置に対する部品補給作業を実施することができる。 In this aspect, when there is a work target area in which a part supply device serving as a part supply target apparatus to be subjected to parts supply work is present, the automatic guided vehicle moves toward the work target area and stops. As a result, the worker can move using the automatic guided vehicle as a mark, and can perform a component supply operation for the component supply device in the work target area at the position where the automatic guided vehicle is stopped.
　上記の部品実装システムにおいて、前記作業計画管理装置は、前記作業対象特定部により特定された前記作業対象領域の各々で実施される全ての前記段取り作業の進捗状況を監視し、当該進捗状況が作業開始、作業終了、及び作業未実施の何れの状況であるかを判定する作業進捗判定部を、更に含む構成であってもよい。そして、前記移動制御部は、前記作業進捗判定部による判定結果に基づいて、前記誘導移動処理を実行する。 In the component mounting system, the work plan management apparatus monitors the progress status of all the setup operations performed in each of the work target areas specified by the work target specifying unit, and the progress status is a work The configuration may further include a work progress determination unit that determines whether the status is start, work end, or work not performed. And the said movement control part performs the said guidance movement process based on the determination result by the said work progress determination part.
　この態様では、作業進捗判定部により判定された作業開始、作業終了、作業未実施の、段取り作業のリアルタイムな進捗状況に基づいて、無人搬送車の作業対象領域に対する移動を制御することができる。 In this aspect, it is possible to control the movement of the automatic guided vehicle with respect to the work target area based on the real-time progress status of the setup work that is determined by the work progress determination unit, the work start, the work end, and the work not performed.
　上記の部品実装システムにおいて、前記移動制御部は、前記作業未実施の段取り作業が存在する作業対象領域に前記車体部が停車している状態において、当該作業対象領域での全ての段取り作業の進捗状況が前記作業終了となったとき、或いは、１つの段取り作業以外の進捗状況が前記作業終了となり、且つ前記１つの段取り作業の進捗状況が前記作業開始となったときに、次の移動先となる作業対象領域に向けて前記車体部を移動させて停車させる構成であってもよい。 In the component mounting system, the movement control unit is configured to make progress in all setup work in the work target area in a state where the vehicle body is stopped in the work target area in which the setup work in which the work has not been performed exists. When the situation is the end of the work, or when the progress status other than one setup work is the work end and the progress status of the one setup work is the start of the work, The structure which moves and stops the said vehicle body part toward the work object area | region which becomes may be sufficient.
　この態様では、作業者は、無人搬送車が停車している作業対象領域内で実施すべき全ての段取り作業を終了させた上で、無人搬送車を目印として次の作業対象領域に移動することができる。これにより、作業未実施の状態のままの段取り作業が残存して累積されることを可及的に抑止することができる。 In this aspect, the worker moves to the next work target area using the automatic guided vehicle as a mark after completing all the setup work to be performed in the work target area where the automatic guided vehicle is stopped. Can do. Thereby, it can suppress as much as possible that the setup work in the state where work is not performed remains and accumulates.
　上記の部品実装システムにおいて、前記段取り作業には、作業開始の制限時刻が設定されており、前記移動制御部は、前記制限時刻に基づき作業開始を優先させるべき段取り作業となる優先作業の存在を認識すると、前記車体部が停車中の作業対象領域における段取り作業の進捗状況に関わらず、前記優先作業に対応した作業対象領域に向けて前記車体部を移動させて停車させる構成であってもよい。 In the component mounting system described above, a time limit for starting work is set for the setup work, and the movement control unit determines that there is a priority work that is a setup work for which work start should be prioritized based on the time limit. When the vehicle body part is recognized, the vehicle body part may be moved and stopped toward the work target area corresponding to the priority work regardless of the progress of the setup work in the work target area where the vehicle body is stopped. .
　この態様では、作業開始の制限時刻が迫っている優先作業が存在する場合、無人搬送車は、その優先作業を実施すべき作業対象領域に向けて急行して停車する。この無人搬送車が停車した作業対象領域に移動することにより、作業者は、優先作業を実施することができる。 In this aspect, when there is a priority work whose work start time is approaching, the automatic guided vehicle is stopped toward the work target area where the priority work should be performed. By moving the automatic guided vehicle to the work target area where the vehicle is stopped, the worker can perform priority work.
　上記の部品実装システムにおいて、前記段取り作業には、作業開始から作業終了までに要する作業標準時間が作業種ごとに設定されており、前記移動制御部は、前記作業未実施の段取り作業が存在する作業対象領域に前記車体部が停車している状態において、段取り作業の作業種ごとの作業数と前記作業標準時間とに基づいて、当該作業対象領域での前記車体部の滞在許容時間を算出し、当該滞在許容時間が経過したときに、次の移動先となる作業対象領域に向けて前記車体部を移動させて停車させる構成であってもよい。 In the component mounting system, a standard work time required from work start to work end is set for each work type in the setup work, and the movement control unit includes setup work that has not been performed. Based on the number of work for each work type of the setup work and the work standard time in a state where the vehicle body is stopped in the work target area, the allowable stay time of the vehicle body part in the work target area is calculated. When the allowable stay time has elapsed, the vehicle body may be moved and stopped toward the work target area as the next destination.
　この態様では、段取り作業ごとに個別に設定された作業標準時間に基づく滞在許容時間の経過を基準として、無人搬送車は、作業対象領域に順次移動して停車する。これにより、作業者は、無人搬送車が停車している滞在許容時間を、作業対象領域内での全ての段取り作業を終了させるために要する全作業時間の目安とし、段取り作業を実施することができる。このため、作業者は、無人搬送車の移動、停車の周期を作業周期として、各作業対象領域での段取り作業を実施することができる。 In this aspect, the automatic guided vehicle sequentially moves to the work target area and stops on the basis of the elapse of the allowable stay time based on the work standard time set individually for each setup work. As a result, the worker can carry out the setup work by using the allowable stay time during which the automatic guided vehicle is stopped as a guideline for the total work time required to complete all the setup work in the work target area. it can. For this reason, the worker can carry out the setup work in each work target area using the movement and stop periods of the automated guided vehicle as work periods.
　上記の部品実装システムにおいて、前記無人搬送車は、前記車体部の停車時間が前記滞在許容時間に達するまでの残り時間を計時し、前記残り時間が所定の閾値に達したときに、その旨を報知する報知部を、更に含む構成であってもよい。 In the component mounting system, the automatic guided vehicle measures a remaining time until the stop time of the vehicle body portion reaches the allowable stay time, and when the remaining time reaches a predetermined threshold value, the fact is indicated. The structure which further contains the alerting | reporting part to alert | report may be sufficient.
　この態様では、作業者は、報知部による報知を目安として、各作業対象領域での段取り作業を実施することができる。 In this aspect, the worker can perform the setup work in each work target area using the notification by the notification unit as a guide.
　上記の部品実装システムにおいて、前記作業計画管理装置は、前記作業未実施の段取り作業に対する作業開始の可否を表す作業開始可否情報を、前記部品実装機から取得する第１情報取得部を、更に含む構成であってもよい。そして、前記移動制御部は、前記車体部の停車中において、前記作業開始可否情報に基づいて、次の移動先となる作業対象領域での前記段取り作業の開始が可能であるか否かを判断し、段取り作業の開始が不可である場合には、当該作業対象領域への前記車体部の移動を不許可とし、段取り作業の開始が可能となるまで前記車体部を待機させる。 In the above-described component mounting system, the work plan management device further includes a first information acquisition unit that acquires from the component mounter work start availability information indicating whether work start can be performed on the setup work that has not been performed. It may be a configuration. Then, the movement control unit determines whether the setup work can be started in the work target area as the next movement destination based on the work start availability information while the vehicle body part is stopped. If the setup work cannot be started, the movement of the vehicle body to the work target area is not permitted, and the vehicle body is put on standby until the setup work can be started.
　この態様では、作業者は、無人搬送車が待機している状態を認識することにより、次の作業対象領域での段取り作業の開始が不可であることを把握することができる。 In this aspect, the worker can recognize that it is impossible to start the setup work in the next work target area by recognizing the state where the automatic guided vehicle is waiting.
　上記の部品実装システムにおいて、前記作業計画管理装置は、前記部品実装機に対する緊急作業の実施の要請を表す緊急要請情報を、前記部品実装機から取得する第２情報取得部を、更に含む構成であってもよい。そして、前記移動制御部は、前記緊急要請情報に基づき前記緊急作業の存在を認識すると、前記車体部が停車中の作業対象領域における段取り作業の進捗状況に関わらず、前記緊急要請情報を出力した前記部品実装機の前記作業領域に向けて前記車体部を移動させて停車させる。 In the component mounting system, the work plan management device further includes a second information acquisition unit that acquires, from the component mounter, emergency request information indicating a request for performing an emergency operation on the component mounter. There may be. When the movement control unit recognizes the presence of the emergency work based on the emergency request information, the emergency control information is output regardless of the progress of the setup work in the work target area where the vehicle body is stopped. The vehicle body is moved toward the work area of the component mounter and stopped.
　この態様では、段取り作業とは異種の緊急作業が存在する場合、無人搬送車は、その緊急作業を実施すべき部品実装機の作業領域に向けて急行して停車する。この無人搬送車が停車した作業領域に移動することにより、作業者は、緊急作業を実施することができる。 In this aspect, when there is an emergency work different from the setup work, the automatic guided vehicle is stopped to the work area of the component mounting machine on which the emergency work is to be performed. The worker can carry out emergency work by moving to the work area where the automatic guided vehicle is stopped.
　以上説明した通り、本発明によれば、部品実装ラインの各部品実装機による部品搭載基板の生産に際し、作業者による段取り作業の効率化を図ることが可能な部品実装システムを提供することができる。 As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a component mounting system capable of improving the efficiency of setup work by an operator when producing a component mounting board by each component mounting machine of a component mounting line. .
　１　部品実装システム
　２　部品実装機
　２Ｌ　部品実装ライン
　２４１，２４５，２４６　部品供給装置
　３　作業計画管理装置
　３１　通信部（第１情報取得部、第２情報取得部）
　３４　制御部
　３４１　部品供給監視部
　３４２　作業管理部
　３４２１　作業対象特定部
　３４３　作業進捗判定部
　６　無人搬送車
　６１　車体部
　６２　荷台部
　６３　移動制御部
　６４　報知部
　ＪＨ０１　補給部品種情報
　ＪＨ０２　補給検知情報
　ＪＨ０３　作業開始可否情報
　ＪＨ０４　緊急要請情報
　ＪＨ１　取付情報
　ＪＨ２　生産計画情報
　ＪＨ３　基板情報
　ＪＨ４，ＪＨ４Ａ，ＪＨ４Ｂ，ＪＨ４Ｃ　作業リスト情報
　ＷＡ　作業領域 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Component mounting system 2 Component mounting machine 2L Component mounting line 241,245,246 Component supply apparatus 3 Work plan management apparatus 31 Communication part (1st information acquisition part, 2nd information acquisition part)
34 control unit 341 component supply monitoring unit 342 work management unit 3421 work target specifying unit 343 work progress determination unit 6 automatic guided vehicle 61 vehicle body unit 62 loading platform 63 movement control unit 64 notification unit JH01 supply component type information JH02 supply detection information JH03 work JH04 Emergency request information JH1 Mounting information JH2 Production plan information JH3 Board information JH4, JH4A, JH4B, JH4C Work list information WA Work area

Claims (9)

  1. 　基板に部品を搭載し部品搭載基板を生産する部品実装機が複数連結された部品実装ラインと、
    　前記複数の部品実装機の各々に予め設定された作業領域内における、前記部品搭載基板の生産に応じて作業者が実施すべき段取り作業の計画を管理する作業計画管理装置と、
    　前記各作業領域を通る所定の移動経路に沿って自動的に移動可能な無人搬送車と、を備え、
    　前記作業計画管理装置は、前記各作業領域のうち、前記作業者による前記段取り作業の作業対象となる作業対象領域を特定する作業対象特定部を含み、
    　前記無人搬送車は、
    　　前記段取り作業用の物品を収容する荷台部を有する車体部と、
    　　前記作業者を誘導するように前記車体部を前記作業対象領域に順次移動させて停車させる誘導移動処理を実行する移動制御部と、を含む、部品実装システム。     A component mounting line in which a plurality of component mounting machines that mount components on a substrate and produce component mounting substrates are connected,
    A work plan management device for managing a plan of setup work to be performed by an operator in accordance with production of the component mounting board in a work area set in advance in each of the plurality of component mounting machines;
    An automatic guided vehicle that can automatically move along a predetermined movement route passing through each of the work areas, and
    The work plan management device includes a work target identifying unit that identifies a work target area that is a work target of the setup work by the worker among the work areas.
    The automatic guided vehicle is
    A vehicle body portion having a cargo bed portion that accommodates the article for setup work;
    A component mounting system, comprising: a movement control unit that performs a guidance movement process of sequentially moving the vehicle body unit to the work target area and stopping the vehicle so as to guide the worker.
  2. 　前記複数の部品実装機の各々は、前記作業領域内に並設され、部品が収納された部品収納部材を装着可能な複数の部品供給装置を含み、
    　前記段取り作業は、前記部品供給装置に対して前記部品収納部材を補給する部品補給作業を含み、
    　前記作業対象特定部は、前記部品補給作業が可能な部品供給装置である部品補給対象装置が配置される作業領域を、前記作業対象領域として特定する、請求項１に記載の部品実装システム。     Each of the plurality of component mounting machines includes a plurality of component supply devices that are arranged in parallel in the work area and can be mounted with a component storage member that stores components.
    The setup operation includes a component supply operation for supplying the component storage member to the component supply device,
    The component mounting system according to claim 1, wherein the work target specifying unit specifies a work area in which a component supply target apparatus, which is a component supply apparatus capable of performing the component supply work, is arranged as the work target area.
  3. 　前記作業計画管理装置は、前記作業対象特定部により特定された前記作業対象領域の各々で実施される全ての前記段取り作業の進捗状況を監視し、当該進捗状況が作業開始、作業終了、及び作業未実施の何れの状況であるかを判定する作業進捗判定部を、更に含み、
    　前記移動制御部は、前記作業進捗判定部による判定結果に基づいて、前記誘導移動処理を実行する、請求項１又は２に記載の部品実装システム。     The work plan management device monitors the progress status of all the setup work performed in each of the work target areas specified by the work target specifying unit, and the progress status indicates the work start, work end, and work It further includes a work progress determination unit that determines which state has not been implemented,
    The component mounting system according to claim 1, wherein the movement control unit executes the guided movement process based on a determination result by the work progress determination unit.
  4. 　前記移動制御部は、前記作業未実施の段取り作業が存在する作業対象領域に前記車体部が停車している状態において、当該作業対象領域での全ての段取り作業の進捗状況が前記作業終了となったとき、或いは、１つの段取り作業以外の進捗状況が前記作業終了となり、且つ前記１つの段取り作業の進捗状況が前記作業開始となったときに、次の移動先となる作業対象領域に向けて前記車体部を移動させて停車させる、請求項３に記載の部品実装システム。 In the state where the vehicle body part is stopped in the work target area where the setup work in which the work has not been performed exists, the movement control unit determines that the progress of all the setup work in the work target area is the end of the work. Or when the progress status other than one set-up operation is the end of the operation and the progress status of the one set-up operation is the start of the operation, toward the work target area to be the next movement destination. The component mounting system according to claim 3, wherein the vehicle body is moved to stop.
  5. 　前記段取り作業には、作業開始の制限時刻が設定されており、
    　前記移動制御部は、前記制限時刻に基づき作業開始を優先させるべき段取り作業となる優先作業の存在を認識すると、前記車体部が停車中の作業対象領域における段取り作業の進捗状況に関わらず、前記優先作業に対応した作業対象領域に向けて前記車体部を移動させて停車させる、請求項４に記載の部品実装システム。     The setup work has a time limit for starting work,
    When the movement control unit recognizes the presence of a priority work that is a setup work to prioritize the start of work based on the time limit, regardless of the progress of the setup work in the work target area where the vehicle body is stopped, The component mounting system according to claim 4, wherein the vehicle body is moved toward a work target area corresponding to priority work and stopped.
  6. 　前記段取り作業には、作業開始から作業終了までに要する作業標準時間が作業種ごとに設定されており、
    　前記移動制御部は、前記作業未実施の段取り作業が存在する作業対象領域に前記車体部が停車している状態において、段取り作業の作業種ごとの作業数と前記作業標準時間とに基づいて、当該作業対象領域での前記車体部の滞在許容時間を算出し、当該滞在許容時間が経過したときに、次の移動先となる作業対象領域に向けて前記車体部を移動させて停車させる、請求項３に記載の部品実装システム。     In the setup work, a work standard time required from work start to work end is set for each work type,
    The movement control unit is based on the number of work for each work type of the setup work and the work standard time in a state where the vehicle body part is stopped in a work target area where the setup work in which the work has not been performed exists. The allowable stay time of the vehicle body part in the work target area is calculated, and when the allowable stay time has elapsed, the vehicle body part is moved toward the work target area as a next movement destination and stopped. Item 4. The component mounting system according to Item 3.
  7. 　前記無人搬送車は、前記車体部の停車時間が前記滞在許容時間に達するまでの残り時間を計時し、前記残り時間が所定の閾値に達したときに、その旨を報知する報知部を、更に含む、請求項６に記載の部品実装システム。 The automatic guided vehicle measures a remaining time until the stop time of the vehicle body reaches the allowable stay time, and further notifies a notification when the remaining time reaches a predetermined threshold. The component mounting system according to claim 6, further comprising:
  8. 　前記作業計画管理装置は、前記作業未実施の段取り作業に対する作業開始の可否を表す作業開始可否情報を、前記部品実装機から取得する第１情報取得部を、更に含み、
    　前記移動制御部は、前記車体部の停車中において、前記作業開始可否情報に基づいて、次の移動先となる作業対象領域での前記段取り作業の開始が可能であるか否かを判断し、段取り作業の開始が不可である場合には、当該作業対象領域への前記車体部の移動を不許可とし、段取り作業の開始が可能となるまで前記車体部を待機させる、請求項３～７のいずれか１項に記載の部品実装システム。     The work plan management device further includes a first information acquisition unit that acquires, from the component mounter, work start availability information indicating whether work start is possible for the setup work that has not been performed.
    The movement control unit determines whether the setup work can be started in a work target area as a next movement destination based on the work start availability information while the vehicle body part is stopped. 8. If the start of the setup work is impossible, the movement of the vehicle body part to the work target area is disallowed, and the vehicle body part is put on standby until the setup work can be started. The component mounting system according to any one of claims.
  9. 　前記作業計画管理装置は、前記部品実装機に対する緊急作業の実施の要請を表す緊急要請情報を、前記部品実装機から取得する第２情報取得部を、更に含み、
    　前記移動制御部は、前記緊急要請情報に基づき前記緊急作業の存在を認識すると、前記車体部が停車中の作業対象領域における段取り作業の進捗状況に関わらず、前記緊急要請情報を出力した前記部品実装機の前記作業領域に向けて前記車体部を移動させて停車させる、請求項３～８のいずれか１項に記載の部品実装システム。     The work plan management device further includes a second information acquisition unit that acquires, from the component mounter, emergency request information indicating a request for performing an emergency operation on the component mounter,
    When the movement control unit recognizes the presence of the emergency work based on the emergency request information, the component that has output the emergency request information regardless of the progress of the setup work in the work target area where the vehicle body part is stopped The component mounting system according to any one of claims 3 to 8, wherein the vehicle body is moved toward the work area of the mounting machine and stopped.
PCT/JP2018/013719 2018-03-30 2018-03-30 Component mounting system WO2019187036A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
DE112018007404.8T DE112018007404T5 (en) 2018-03-30 2018-03-30 COMPONENT MOUNTING SYSTEM
JP2020508813A JP7018123B2 (en) 2018-03-30 2018-03-30 Component mounting system
PCT/JP2018/013719 WO2019187036A1 (en) 2018-03-30 2018-03-30 Component mounting system

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2018/013719 WO2019187036A1 (en) 2018-03-30 2018-03-30 Component mounting system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019187036A1 true WO2019187036A1 (en) 2019-10-03

Family

ID=68061144

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/013719 WO2019187036A1 (en) 2018-03-30 2018-03-30 Component mounting system

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7018123B2 (en)
DE (1) DE112018007404T5 (en)
WO (1) WO2019187036A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113511265A (en) * 2020-03-27 2021-10-19 丰田自动车株式会社 Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and information processing system
WO2022269791A1 (en) * 2021-06-23 2022-12-29 株式会社Fuji Management device, mounting system, and production method

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH06350287A (en) * 1993-06-03 1994-12-22 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Method for replacing parts in electronic parts mounter
JP2003321106A (en) * 2002-04-30 2003-11-11 Ishida Co Ltd Article sorting system, method and program for sorting operation management
JP2012028660A (en) * 2010-07-27 2012-02-09 Fuji Mach Mfg Co Ltd Component replenishment optimization device and component replenishment optimization method of component mounting line
JP2015041734A (en) * 2013-08-23 2015-03-02 パナソニック株式会社 Component mounting method
JP2016225385A (en) * 2015-05-28 2016-12-28 パナソニックＩｐマネジメント株式会社 Component replenishment support method and component replenishment support system in component mounting line

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH06350287A (en) * 1993-06-03 1994-12-22 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Method for replacing parts in electronic parts mounter
JP2003321106A (en) * 2002-04-30 2003-11-11 Ishida Co Ltd Article sorting system, method and program for sorting operation management
JP2012028660A (en) * 2010-07-27 2012-02-09 Fuji Mach Mfg Co Ltd Component replenishment optimization device and component replenishment optimization method of component mounting line
JP2015041734A (en) * 2013-08-23 2015-03-02 パナソニック株式会社 Component mounting method
JP2016225385A (en) * 2015-05-28 2016-12-28 パナソニックＩｐマネジメント株式会社 Component replenishment support method and component replenishment support system in component mounting line

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113511265A (en) * 2020-03-27 2021-10-19 丰田自动车株式会社 Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and information processing system
WO2022269791A1 (en) * 2021-06-23 2022-12-29 株式会社Fuji Management device, mounting system, and production method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP7018123B2 (en) 2022-02-09
JPWO2019187036A1 (en) 2021-01-07
DE112018007404T5 (en) 2020-12-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6738419B2 (en) Component mounting system and management device
JP6732958B2 (en) Parts supply management system and parts mounting system
WO2019187036A1 (en) Component mounting system
JP6950090B2 (en) Parts supply management system and parts mounting system
JP6902671B2 (en) Work plan management system and component mounting system
JP6912663B2 (en) Parts supply management system and parts mounting system
JP6883141B2 (en) Parts supply management system and parts mounting system
WO2019229880A1 (en) Component replenishment management system and component mounting system
CN113348736B (en) Setup device for setup work of setup change
JP2020014021A (en) Unit storage and component mounting line
JP2020014019A (en) Component mounting line
JP7011497B2 (en) Work management system and component mounting system
JP6990147B2 (en) Component mounting system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18911479

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020508813

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18911479

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1